SERVICE MANUAL

SSD - ALPHA10

1/2

English Edition

Document Number : MN2-2008

Document Revision : 2!

Copyright©

FILE 1
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SSD-ALPHA10 SERVICE MANUAL

Contents of SSD-ALPHA10 SERVICE MANUAL 1/2

PAGE

Section 1 How to use this service manual page 1-1~1-4 (4 pages)

1-1 Service Manual···················································································· 1- 1
1-2 Contents of this Service Manual ·························································· 1- 1
1-3 Construction of This Service Manual··················································· 1- 1
1-4 Contents of Each Section····································································· 1- 2

Section 2 PRECAUTIONS (read without fail) page 2-1~2-6 (6 pages)

2-1 Precautions Against Electrical Hazards to Serviceman ························ 2- 1
2-2 Precautions Against Mechanical Hazards to Serviceman ····················· 2- 1
2-3 Precautions Against Germ Hazards to Serviceman ······························ 2- 1
2-4 Precautions for Keeping Electrical Safety············································ 2- 2
2-5 Precautions for Keeping Mechanical Safety ········································ 2- 2
2-6 Precautions for Keeping Chemicals Safety ·········································· 2- 2
2-7 Preparation to be Made at Service Center ············································ 2- 2
2-8 Care to be taken in the Field ································································ 2- 3
2-9 Precaution for Monitor repairing ························································· 2- 3
2-10 Handling of S.M.D. PCBs ··································································· 2- 4
2-11 System symbols··················································································· 2- 5

Section 3 BEFORE REPAIRING page 3-1~3-12 (12 pages)

3-1 Repair work on the description of Service Manual ······························ 3- 1
3-2 Upgrade work on the description of Service Manual ··························· 3- 6

Section 4 PRINCIPLE OF SYSTEM OPERATION page 4-1~4-102 (102 pages)

4-1 System Specification ··········································································· 4- 1
4-2 System Configuration·········································································· 4 - 17
4-3 System Block Diagram········································································ 4 - 20
4-4 Principle of System Operation····························································· 4 - 75
4-4-1 System Control ···································································· 4 - 75
4-4-2 Tx/Rx unit············································································ 4 - 81
4-4-3 Digital Imaging Unit ···························································· 4 - 91
4-4-4 Physiological Signal Display unit PEU-ALPHA10* ············ 4 - 99
4-4-5 Power Supply unit PSU-ALPHA10 ····································· 4 - 100
4-4-6 Viewing Color TV Monitor·················································· 4 - 102

1/6
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SSD-ALPHA10 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5 SCHEMATICS page 5-1~5-208 (208 pages)

Main Body
SSD-ALPHA10 CABLE CONNECTION ·········································· 5- 1
CABLE 001, 010, 011, 012, 013, 020, 030, 031, 032, 033 ·················· 5- 7
CABLE 101, 110, 111 ········································································· 5 - 18
CABLE 201 ························································································ 5 - 19
CABLE 301 ························································································ 5 - 20
CABLE 401, 410, 420········································································· 5 - 21
CABLE 701, 710 ················································································ 5 - 23
CABLE 801, 802 ················································································ 5 - 25
CABLE 950, 951, 953, 954, 955, 956, 957·········································· 5 - 28

Backplane EP4911··························································· 5 - 35
EP5280··························································· 5 - 58

TD Jumper EP4973··························································· 5 - 81
DBF Jumper EP4974··························································· 5 - 82
Jumper EP5262··························································· 5 - 83
EP5325··························································· 5 - 84

Storage drive unit EU-9098

Foot SW PCB EP4732 ··················································· 5 - 85
CABLE 520, 521, 522, 530································································· 5 - 86
USB/ATA Converter EP5178 ··················································· 5 - 91
USB/ATA Converter-HUB EP5503 ··················································· 5 - 93
CABLE 501, 502, 510········································································· 5 - 90

Main power supply unit EU-6030*

EU-6030B Circuit Diagram································································· 5 - 99
EU-6030B Wiring Diagram································································· 5 - 100
EU-6030C Circuit Diagram································································· 5 - 101
EU-6030C Wiring Diagram································································· 5 - 102
EU-6030D* Circuit Diagram ······························································ 5 - 103
EU-6030D* Wiring Diagram ······························································ 5 - 104
EU-6030E* Circuit Diagram······························································· 5 - 105
EU-6030E* Wiring Diagram······························································· 5 - 106
EU-6030F Circuit Diagram ································································· 5 - 107
EU-6030F Wiring Diagram ································································· 5 - 108
EU-6030G Circuit Diagram ································································ 5 - 109
EU-6030G Wiring Diagram ································································ 5 - 110
AC Line Filter Unit EP510400B* ····································· 5 - 111
EP510400D*····································· 5 - 112

2/6
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SSD-ALPHA10 SERVICE MANUAL

AC/DC Converter Unit EP510500A*····································· 5 - 113

EP510500D*····································· 5 - 114
DC/DC Converter unit (1) EP510600B* ····································· 5 - 115
EP510600D*····································· 5 - 116
DC/DC Converter unit (2) EP510700B* ····································· 5 - 117
EP510700D*····································· 5 - 118
Low Voltage Circuit (1) EP510800B* ····································· 5 - 119
EP510800D*····································· 5 - 120
Low Voltage Circuit (2) EP510900B* ····································· 5 - 121
EP510900C* ····································· 5 - 122
Motherboard EP511000C* ····································· 5 - 123
EP511000D* ····································· 5 - 124
DC/DC Converter unit EP537200A*····································· 5 - 125
Low Voltage Circuit EP537300A*····································· 5 - 126
CABLE 041, 042, 043········································································· 5 - 128

Sub power supply unit EU-6031*

EU-6031B Circuit Diagram································································· 5 - 131
EU-6031B Wiring Diagram································································· 5 - 132
EU-6031C Circuit Diagram································································· 5 - 133
EU-6031C Wiring Diagram································································· 5 - 134
High Voltage Circuit (1) EP511100A* ····································· 5 - 135
EP511100C* ····································· 5 - 139
High Voltage Circuit (2) EP5127·············································· 5 - 143
AC Outlet EP5250·············································· 5 - 144

Viewing Color TV monitor IPC-1710*

IPC-1710/-1710(B) FRAME CONNECTION····································· 5 - 145
IPC-1710/-1710(B) MAIN CIRCUIT ················································· 5 - 146
IPC-1710/-1710(B) VIDEO CIRCUIT················································ 5 - 150
IPC-1710(C) FRAME CONNECTION··············································· 5 - 151
IPC-1710(C) MAIN CIRCUIT···························································· 5 - 152
IPC-1710(C) VIDEO CIRCUIT ·························································· 5 - 156

Viewing Color TV monitor IPF-1901

The schematics of IPF-1901 is not available because of NDA - non-disclosure agreement
between manufacturer and ALOKA.

Operation Panel L-KEY-84*

Panel Control PCB EP513200C* (for L-KEY-84B*) ···················· 5 - 157
EP513200E* (for L-KEY-84C~G) ················· 5 - 165
EP513200G* (for L-KEY-84H)······················ 5 - 173
Panel Switch PCB EP513300EE (for L-KEY-84C~F)·················· 5 - 181

3/6
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SSD-ALPHA10 SERVICE MANUAL

EP513300EF (for L-KEY-84G~)···················· 5 - 187

Panel Menu PCB EP513400C* (for L-KEY-84C~G) ················· 5 - 193
EP513400D* (for L-KEY-84H)······················ 5 - 197

Physio Signal display unit PEU-ALPHA10*

PEU-ALPHA10* CABLE CONNECTION ········································ 5 - 201
CABLE 601, 610, 611, 612 ································································· 5 - 202

Independent probe connection unit EU-9110

CABLE 900 ························································································ 5 - 207

4/6
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SSD-ALPHA10 SERVICE MANUAL

Contents of SSD-ALPHA10 SERVICE MANUAL 2/2

Section 6 TROUBLE SHOOTING

Section 7 ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

Section 8 PERFORMANCE CHECK

Section 9 DISASSEMBLING PROCEDURE

Section 10 PARTS LIST

Section 11 SERVICE INFORMATION

Appendix SSD-ALPHA10 SERVICE MANUAL Appendix

5/6
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SSD-ALPHA10 SERVICE MANUAL

(Blank page)

6/6
 SECTION 1

How to use this service manual

SECTION 1
 MN2-2008
SECTION 1 How to use this service manual

1-1 Service Manual

1. This service manual has been prepared for persons in charge of repair at the field.
2. This service manual is compiled according to the following basic principle. ”For service, pick out a
faulty PCB and replace it with a new PCB.”
3. Make the best use of this service manual, making also reference to available technical support
information such as “Technical Bulletin”.

1-2 Contents of this Service Manual

1. The equipment is repaired by PCB replacement. Therefore this service manual does not include the
circuit diagrams of the PCB unit. For the function of each PCBs whose circuit diagram is not
included, refer to ”SECTION 4 PRINCIPLE OF SYSTEM OPERATION”.
In “SECTION 4”, Specification of System, Principle of System, System Block Diagram, PCB
Block Diagram, the explanation of each PCB Block Diagram, and signal list are described.
However, “Cable Connection Diagram”, “Circuit Diagram of PCB equipped with the panel
switches which are easily exchangeable at the field” and ”Circuit Diagram composed of general
circuit such as TV monitor and Power Supply unit” are described in ”SECTION 5
SCHEMATICS”.
2. For changes and modifications of as well as additions to specifications, if any, prompt information
will be given to you by means of “APPENDIX Manual Change Information”.

#IMPORTANT# Always observe the manner specified for replacement, addition, or

deletion of “Manual Change” to prevent missing of necessary
information and keeping of erroneous information.

1-3 Construction of This Service Manual

The structure of Service Manual is as follows:

1) Service Instructions .......................................................................... SECTION 1~3, 5~9, 11
2) Principle of Operation....................................................................... SECTION 4
3) Parts List ........................................................................................... SECTION 10
4) Manual Change Information............................................................. APPENDIX

1-1
MN2-2008
SECTION 1 How to use this service manual

1-4 Contents of Each Section

SECTION 1 How to use this service manual

Describes the purpose of the Service Manual.

SECTION 2 PRECAUTIONS

Describes general precautions and preparations for maintenance service. Be sure to follow working
procedures if mentioned.

SECTION 3 BEFORE REPAIRING

Gives information peculiar to the equipment and care to be taken before starting repair work.

SECTION 4 PRINCIPLE OF SYSTEM OPERATION

Describes Specification of System, Principle of System, System Block Diagram, PCB Block diagram,
the explanation of each PCB Block Diagram, and Signal List. Gives the convenience of grasping flow
of major signals and mutual communication between units in the whole system.

SECTION 5 SCHEMATICS

Gives the cable connection diagram including all cables used, the circuit diagram of PCB equipped
with switches, and the circuit diagram of TV monitor and Power Supply unit.

SECTION 6 TROUBLESHOOTING

Describes precautions on actual repair work and shows the necessary tools and measuring instruments.
Also, includes many hints on primary diagnosis and measures to be taken in the field.

SECTION 7 ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

Gives guides of adjustments of PCBs and units which some PCBs need when they are replaced.

SECTION 8 PERFORMANCE CHECK

Describes the procedure of checking for proper operation after repair and provides the forms of check
sheet.

SECTION 9 DISASSEMBLING PROCEDURE

Disassembling Procedure Illustrates the disassembly and assembly of main components. Be sure to
follow working procedures if specified.

SECTION 10 PARTS LIST

Lists the mechanical parts and electrical part which replacement possibility are considered.

1-2
 MN2-2008
SECTION 1 How to use this service manual

SECTION 11 SERVICE INFORMATION

Provides available information about maintenance service.

APPENDIX SERVICE MANUAL Appendix

Manual change information, the revision list of this manual, is filed in this section.

1-3
MN2-2008
SECTION 1 How to use this service manual

(Blank page)

1-4
SECTION 2

PRECAUTIONS

SECTION 2
 MN2-2008
SECTION 2 PRECAUTIONS

2-1 Precautions Against Electrical Hazards to Serviceman

When disassembling the equipment after checking it for a trouble symptom, give care to the following:
1) Be sure to unplug the equipment before disassembly.
2) Be sure to turn off the main switch on the equipment when removing electrical parts such as PCBs,
probe, and cable.
3) Safety alert symbols
4) The indication used on this equipment and in this service manual have the following meaning
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury. ”
A caution message is inserted here. ”

2-2 Precautions Against Mechanical Hazards to Serviceman

When disassembling the equipment, give care to the following to protect serviceman from hazards:
1) Keep the working environment neat.
2) Wear working gloves to protect your hands from getting injured by burrs on the unit and casing.
3) Use only proper tools suited to work being made.
4) Be sure to observe the specified disassembly procedure shown in SECTION 9.
5) Take sufficient care not to damage component with undue load.

2-3 Precautions Against Germ Hazards to Serviceman

1) When it is necessary to touch the equipment, options and/or other peripheral devices at a customer
who uses intracorporeal (transesophageal, transurethral, transvaginal, transrectal) probes that need
sterilization, take special care to protect your hands against germs, irrespective of the usage of the
equipment: whether it is used in the operation room or not.
2) Service tools are subject to germ pollution in hospitals and, therefore, need periodical sterilization.
3) Be careful not to directly touch anything assumable to have germ pollution. If necessary, ask the
customer for effective protection against germs.

2-1
MN2-2008
SECTION 2 PRECAUTIONS

2-4 Precautions for Keeping Electrical Safety

1) Be sure to ground the equipment securely.

2) Perfectness in grounding, screw tightening, and cover installation is essential. Negligence of it
could cause a possibility of leakage current from outer fitting which may lead to serious damage to
a patient being diagnosed.

2-5 Precautions for Keeping Mechanical Safety

Take care to the following to prevent the equipment from being damaged or broken during disassembly
and reassembly work.
1) Be sure to observe the specified disassembly procedure.
2) Take care not to damage component parts by undue load.
3) Take care not to damage component parts by undue load.
4) Use only the specified screws and nuts. Using any other screws and/or nuts would affect not only
mechanical performance, but also electrical performance of the equipment.

2-6 Precautions for Keeping Chemicals Safety

Whenever grease, oil or other chemicals is used for maintenance service, options and/or peripheral
devices, be sure to clean the equipment and/or devices after service work.

2-7 Preparation to be Made at Service Center

1) When called by a customer on the telephone, note the followings:

# Name of equipment
# Serial number of equipment
# Name of hospital
# Telephone number
# Name of person in charge
# Detail of trouble symptom as far as possible
# State of connection to optional devices
2) Go over the “Technical Bulletin” and “Technical Notes” to see whether the complained trouble can
be mended by means of regular repairing method.

2-2
 MN2-2008
SECTION 2 PRECAUTIONS

2-8 Care to be Taken in the Field

1) Check for trouble symptoms.

2) Check for connection to optional devices and other peripheral devices.
3) Record the contents of the battery backup memory.
4) After working, restore the equipment according to the above mentioned contents of memory if
necessary.
5) After completion of work, put back the peripheral devices to the original condition.

2-9 Precaution for Monitor repairing

1) Subjecting the unit to strong shocks may result in damage to the CRT or malfunction, therefore
care must be taken when transporting or installing the unit.

# DANGER # High voltages are present inside the display chassis. Only experienced
technicians should touch internal parts.

# DANGER # The electric charge has remained in CRT after the power switch is turned off.
Because the high voltage is usually used for CRT. So make the electric
charge escape with a grounding stick which is connected to the ground of the
chassis and through the resistance for high voltage (Approx. 1M") before
removing the anode cap.
Some electric charge remains in CRT after escaping with a grounding stick.
Do not touch the metallic part of anode cap with bare hands, when detaching
the anode cap directly.

2) CRT with the deflecting yoke is already adjusted to the best condition. Do not touch the
deflecting yoke and the magnet of the neck part.
3) Be sure to detach the metallic goods such as a wrist watch from your body before doing the repair
work.

To prevent the secondary damage and the electrical shock, the matters above should be taken into
careful consideration.

2-3
MN2-2008
SECTION 2 PRECAUTIONS

2-10 Handling of S.M.D. PCBs

It is an Aloka's policy that neither repair nor modification of PCBs used for S.M.D. is made in the field
as a rule because of the following reasons:
[REMARKS] PCB does not need repairing or modifying in the field as a rule.

When handling a PCB, do not touch the IC unless it is necessary.

IC soiled with worker’s hands may cause corrosion. Additionally, foreign particles such as fine solder
dust could be the cause of short-circuited IC lead wires whose pitch is smaller than that of the traditional
ones.

# CAUTION #When handling a PCB, avoid touching the IC and connector pins on the
devices to prevent ESD (Electro Static Discharge) damage.
A service person should preferably wear an ESD wrist strap correctly
grounded when handling a PCB.

Do not give excessively large shocks to the PCB.

When replacing the ROM (Read Only Memory) on the PCB, attempting to force the ROM into its
socket would cause the PCB to be subjected to an undue force, and the following faults may :
1) Damage to PCB intermediate-layer patterns,
2) Peeling of chip devices (resistor, capacitor, diode, etc.),
3) Damage to a junction between electrode and internal element of chip devices,
4) Peeling of patterns (especially those for mounting the parts) together with chip devices since those
patterns are rather fragile compared with PCBs used before now, and
5) Damage to parts on the reverse side in the case of PCBs of both-side mounting type.

Also, a PCB mounted improperly or a warped PCB mounted as it is may cause the chip devices to come
off and the fine patterns to be cut.
Additionally, reuse of chip devices (including resistors, capacitors, diodes, etc.) is strictly inhibited
because of the following reason:
Since the chip devices are lacking in lead wires, such as those found in the traditional component parts,
heat given to the PCB will be directly conducted to the inside of chip devices. As a result, a thermal
stress will occur due to a difference in thermal expansion coefficient between each chip device and PCB,
giving rise of the possibility of cracks inside of or on the surface of chip devices or the possibility of
thermal breaking (internal burning).

Very thin wiring patterns require extreme care in handling of the PCB.
Be sure to observe the precautions mentioned above also to prevent the secondary accidents.

2-4
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 2 PRECAUTIONS

2-11 System Symbols

Symbols used by Aloka are described below, together with reference to IEC publication(s).

No. Symbol Position Meaning

Danger
1
Carefully read the pertinent items in the operation
manual, and handle the equipment with grate care.
Various Places ANSI standard Z535.3
IEC60601-1, Attached table D
BS 5378 PART1' Appendix A
2 Biohazard
On the side of ANSI standard Z535.3
ISO7000 No.0659
probe connector
BS 5378 PART1' Appendix A
3
Left side panel Be careful of explosion

4 Be careful of electric shock

Left side panel ANSI standard Z535.3

BS 5378 PART1' Appendix A
5 Be careful of fire
Various places
BS 5378 PART1' Appendix A

6
Left side panel Be careful of acoustic power

7 Type BF applied part

PEU-ALPHA10
IEC60601-1, Attached table D

8 Power switch/ Indicates the ON position of the switch.

Main power
supply unit IEC60417-5007

9 Indicates the OFF position of the switch.

Main power
supply unit IEC60417-5008

10 Indicates the STAND BY position of the switch.

Power switch
IEC60417-5009

11 Alternating current
Rear panel
IEC60417-5032

2-5
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 2 PRECAUTIONS

No. Symbol Position Meaning

12 Potential equalization terminal
Rear panel
IEC60417-5021

13 Protected against the effects of continuance immersion

Foot switch
in water
MP-2345B
MP-2614B
IEC60529
14 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) symbol(
A symbol warning of no touching to the pins cropping
Various places out. When touching to the pins cropping out or nearing
to them, there can be of malfunction or breaking down
of the device by electrostatic discharge.
15
Monitor Arm Be careful of catching your fingers.

16
This mark indicates this product complies with
Left side panel Directive 93/42/EEC relation to Medical Device.

17
WEEE Marking
Left side panel
EN50419

18 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE IN THE

Left side panel EUROPEAN COMMUNITY
EN980:2003

19 CONSULT INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Left side panel
EN980:2003

20 MANUFACTURER
Left side panel
EN980:2003

21
DATE OF MANUFACTURE
Rear panel
ISO 15223

2-6
 SECTION 3

Before Repairing

SECTION 3
 MN2-2008
SECTION 3 Before Repairing

3-1 Repair work on the description of Service Manual

The typical processes for the repair work are shown as the Flow Chart on the next page. Do the repair
work according to this procedure. In the case of modification of the Technical Bulletin, Technical Notes
or Upgrade Kit, see the next item 3-2.
Each procedures of flow chart are numbered to refer its detail shown from page 3-3. Furthermore, the
Flow Chart and its explanation show the time when each section of service manual are required on
repair work. This is a guide for the usage of service manual.
The service manual is very important for the repair work, especially readjustment and performance
check after completion of repair work. This is to keep the safety and quality of equipment. If you make
them, you have to describe that the treatment has been done according to the applied section of service
manual, on the repair report or the like.
The circled numbers shown in the Flow Chart on next page, are corresponded to the procedure number
shown from page 3-3.

3-1
MN2-2008
SECTION 3 Before Repairing

Demand of repair
(START)

1 Reception and Technical Bulletin, Technical Notes

Investigation Section 4~6, 11

2 Selection and order of Section 6, 10

Required part(s) History

3 Preparation Section 3
At your site
At Customer side
4 Confirmation

5 Repair and
Section 2, 6, 9
adjustment

6 Operation check Section 8

7
No
Work as normal?

Yes
8 10
Check by customer Yes!
Fill repair report Repair again?
Approve by customer

No
9 11
Present repair report Show comments of the
Demand to repair the prohibition to use on
defective part(s) the equipment

Completion 12 Report to customer

(END)

3-2
 MN2-2008
SECTION 3 Before Repairing

Procedure 1 Reception of repair and investigation

Accept the repair request from the customer or distributor. At this time, the following points have
to be confirmed and checked,
# Model name/number, and serial number
# Name of customer (Hospital), address, phone number, and name of person in charge
# Configuration of the connection of peripheral devices
# Software version or the like shown on the Maintenance display (if possible)
# Detail of phenomenon appeared on the function of equipment

Make an examination what circuit may be defective as the function of equipment based on the
above information. If you need to know about the basic operation and special information for the
maintenance, refer to the following sections, or ask to the Technical Support,

$ Section 4 PRINCIPLE OF SYSTEM OPERATION

$ Section 5 SCHEMATICS
$ Section 6 TROUBLESHOOTING
$ Section 11 SERVICE INFORMATION

The reported phenomenon may be the original problem on the equipment. Because, refer to the
Technical Bulletin or the Technical Notes separately issued to check it whether defectiveness or not.
If it has been reported as the original problem, make a work according to the Technical Bulletin or
the Technical Notes.

Procedure 2 Selection of required parts and order

If you find the doubtful circuit, order the necessary parts. Then check the delivery date and decide
the date to visit on the consultation with the customer.
For the selection and order of parts, refer to the following sections,

$ Section 6 TROUBLESHOOTING
$ Section 10 PARTS LIST

For the electrical parts such as UNIT, check the history information on the HISTORY of this
equipment separately issued.

3-3
MN2-2008
SECTION 3 Before Repairing

Procedure 3 Preparation of visiting the customer

Check the required tools, measuring devices and parts to be replaced before the visiting the
customer. Then check the special information for the equipment reference with the following
section,

$ Section 3 BEFORE REPAIRING

Procedure 4 Confirmation of phenomenon

Confirm the appeared phenomenon and condition to happen it with the customer. If you don’t
know about the operation of equipment, refer to the Operation Manual attached to the equipment.

Procedure 5 Repair and readjustment

Repair the defective circuit with the brought parts. For the repair work, read the following section
carefully,

$ Section 2 PRECAUTIONS

And, examine the trouble reason depending on the situation with following section,

$ Section 6 TROUBLESHOOTING

The electrical or mechanical readjustment may be requested depending on the replaced parts.
Because, refer to the following section after completion of repair,

$ Section 7 ADJUSTMENT

Procedure 6 Operation check

Check the system behavior to keep its condition as same as before in trouble, reference with the
following section. Be sure to do according to the description because check items are depending on
the portion to be treated.

$ Section 8 PERFORMANCE CHECK

3-4
 MN2-2008
SECTION 3 Before Repairing

Procedure 7 Judgment of the operation quality

If the result of “Procedure 6” is passed to the all standards, do the next “Procedure 8”. On the other
side, if not, make a judgment of “Procedure 10”.

Procedure 8 Confirm by customer, make repair report and approve

Reconfirm the solution of trouble phenomenon with the customer. Then make a repair report and
obtain approval of customer.
The repair report shows not only the treatment but also the method of readjustment and operation
check. If they have been done according to the service manual, the followings have to be shown,
Readjusted according to the Section 7 of service manual.”
Checked according to the Section 8 of service manual, and passed.”

Procedure 9 Presentation of report and order to repair parts

Fill the repair report with necessary item, and present it according to the certain procedure.
If the defective parts that trouble cause included is available to use again by repair, make an order
to do. If you cannot judge whether the part can be used again or not, ask to the Technical Support.

Procedure 10 Judgment of possibility to repair again

As the result of judgment on “Procedure 7”, if the trouble is not solved, judge the possibility to
make the repair work again.
If available, return to “Procedure 5” and continue to work.
If unavailable, go to “Procedure 11”.

Procedure 11 Indication of the prohibition to use

As the result of judgment on “Procedure 10”, if you judge that it is impossible to continue the
repair work at this time, indicate that the equipment is still out of order, and also show the
prohibition to use, on the equipment.

Procedure 12 Report to the customer

Report the reason why the trouble cannot be solved to the customer. Then consult about the plan of
next repair work.
And do the same way from “Procedure 2”.

3-5
MN2-2008
SECTION 3 Before Repairing

3-2 Upgrade work on the description of Service Manual

The typical processes for the upgrade work are shown as the Flow Chart on the next page. Do the
upgrade work according to this procedure. In the case of repair work, see the previous item 3-1.
Each procedures of flow chart are numbered to refer its detail shown from page 3-8. Furthermore, the
Flow Chart and its explanation show the time when each section of service manual are required on
upgrade work. This is a guide for the usage of service manual.
The service manual is very important for the upgrade work, especially readjustment and performance
check after completion of upgrade work. This is to keep the safety and quality of equipment.
The circled numbers shown in the Flow Chart on next page, are corresponded to the procedure number
shown from page 3-8.

3-6
 MN2-2008
SECTION 3 Before Repairing

Demand of upgrade
(START)

14

1 Selection and order of Technical Bulletin Consultation with

requires parts/kits Technical Notes Technical Support
Installation Procedure

2 Preparation Section 3
At your site
At customer site
3 Operation check Section 8

4
No
Work as normal?

10 Do the repair work,

Yes according to item 3-1

5 Upgrade Installation Procedure

6 Operation check Installation Procedure

Section 9
Section 8
7
No
Work as normal?

11
Yes Yes
Can recover?
8 Check by customer

No

9 Return unnecessary 12 Show comments of the

parts, and report of prohibition to use on the
upgrade equipment

13
Completion Report to customer
(END)

3-7
MN2-2008
SECTION 3 Before Repairing

Procedure 1 Selection of required parts / kits and order

Accept the upgrade request from the customer, distributor or person in charge of sales. At this time,
the following points have to be confirmed and checked to decide the parts and kits,

# Document name that announced the upgrade or kit requested

# Model name/number, and serial number
# Name of customer (Hospital), address, phone number, and name of person in charge
# Configuration of the connection of peripheral devices
# Software version or the like shown on the Maintenance display

Make an examination what parts or kits are required based on the above information. For the
selection, refer to the following document separately issued, or ask to the Technical Support,

$ Technical Bulletin
$ Technical Notes

To confirm the detail of upgrade, see the Installation Procedure attached with applied Technical
Bulletin or Technical Notes.
Depending on the upgrade, hardware, or software, the other upgrade may be required. Check it
with the Technical Bulletin or Technical Notes.

Then, confirm the delivery date of required parts or kits, and decide the date to visit on the
consultation with the customer.

Procedure 2 Preparation of visiting the customer

Check the required tools, measuring devices and parts or kits to be used before the visiting the
customer. Then check the special information for the equipment reference with the following
section and document,

$ Section 3 BEFORE REPARING

$ Technical Bulletin, Technical Notes and/or Installation Procedure

3-8
 MN2-2008
SECTION 3 Before Repairing

Procedure 3 Operation check before upgrade

On the basis of work, the upgrade to the defective equipment is prohibited. Because, before
upgrade work, check the behavior of equipment whether normal or not according to following
section and document,

$ Section 8 PERFORMANCE CHECK

$ Operation Manual

Procedure 4 Judgment of the operation quality

If the result of “Procedure 3” is passed to the all standards, do the next “Procedure 5”. On the other
side, if not, go to “Procedure 10”.

Procedure 5 Upgrade work

Do the upgrade work according to the following document,

$ Installation Procedure attached with kit, Technical Bulletin or Technical Notes

Procedure 6 Operation check after upgrade

Check the system behavior to keep its condition as same as before the upgrade, reference with the
following section. Be sure to do according to the description because check items are depending on
the portion to be treated.

$ Section 8 PERFORMANCE CHECK

$ Section 9 DISASSEMBLING PROCEDURE
$ Installation Procedure

Procedure 7 Judgment of the operation quality

If the result of “Procedure 6” is passed to the all standards, do the next “Procedure 8”. On the other
side, if not, make a judgment of “Procedure 11”.

3-9
MN2-2008
SECTION 3 Before Repairing

Procedure 8 Confirmation by customer

Reconfirm any functions of equipment with the customer. Then, if need, introduce and explain
about the new functions and specification added by this upgrade.
Furthermore, if need, make a report to be approved by the customer. The report shows not only the
treatment but also the method of operation check. If it has been done according to the service
manual, the following has to be shown,
“Checked according to the Section 8 of service manual, and passed.”

Procedure 9 Return of unnecessary parts and report of completion

According to the Technical Bulletin or Technical Notes, return the unnecessary replaced or unused
parts as soon as possible if suggested.
And, if the report of upgrade is suggested on the same document, report it with the information
required.

Procedure 10 Work for the abnormal behavior of equipment

On the result of judgment in “Procedure 4”, if the equipment does not work normal, solve the
problem according to item 3-1 “Repair work on the description of service manual” shown in this
section.
When the problem is solved, return to “Procedure 5” of this item and continue to do the upgrade
work.

Procedure 11 Judgment of possibility to recover

As the result of judgment on “Procedure 7”, if the problem has been made by this upgrade, judge
the possibility to recover it.
If available, return to “Procedure 5” and continue to work.
If unavailable, go to “Procedure 12”.

3 - 10
 MN2-2008
SECTION 3 Before Repairing

Procedure 12 Indication of the prohibition to use

As the result of judgment on “Procedure 11”, if you judge that it is impossible to recover at this
time, indicate that the equipment is the out of order, and also show the prohibition to use, on the
equipment.

Procedure 13 Report to the customer

Report to the customer that the upgrade has not been completed because of the problem on the
upgrade work. Then make a schedule to fix and complete it.

Procedure 14 Asking to the Technical Support

Report to the Technical Support about the happening of problem on the upgrade work, make an
examination to solve and order the additional parts. Before the asking, check the following points,
# Name of kit, or the issue number of Technical Bulletin or Technical Notes showing the upgrade
# Model name/number, and serial number
# Configuration of the connection of peripheral devices
# Software version or the like shown on the Maintenance display
# Indication of equipment such as Upgrade
# Detail of phenomenon appeared on the function of equipment

3 - 11
MN2-2008
SECTION 3 Before Repairing

(Blank page)

3 - 12
 SECTION 4

PRINCIPLE OF SYSTEM OPERATION

SECTION 4
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

4-1 System Specification Notes about expression:

The comments like “Ver.2~” in this document generally means the level
of system in combination of software and hardware. Therefore, some of
specification below may not be applied if only the software is
compatible.

Scanning System Electronic Linear Scanning

Electronic Convex Scanning
Electronic Sector Scanning
1.5D Array Electronic Linear Scanning
Electronic Convex (3D) Scanning
(the SOP-ALPHA10-4 is required)
Ver.3~ Electronic Sector (3D) Scanning
(the SOP-ALPHA10-4 is required)
Ver.3~ Independent probe (the EU-9110 is required)
Ver.4~ Mechanical Sector Scanning
(the EU-9109 or EU-9124 is required)
Ver.4~ Mechanical Radial Scanning
(the EU-9109 or EU-9124 is required)
Ver.4~ Motorized trans-esophageal probe
Ver.5.1~ Olympus Ultrasonic Gastrovideoscope
(Convex sector type: the SOP-ALPHA10-17 is required)
(Electronic radial type: the SOP-ALPHA10-18 is required)

Simultaneously Attached Probes Electronic Probe .......4 probes

Ver.3~ Independent probe ....1 probe (the EU-9110 is required)
Ver.4~ Mechanical probe .....1 probe
(the EU-9109 or EU-9124 is required)

Operating Modes B (Fundamental, THE, CHE)

M (Include FAM)
D (PW Doppler, CW Doppler, STCW Doppler)
Flow (Velocity/Variance, Power Flow, TDI)
Ver.2.1~ eFlow (For Lite version, the SOP-ALPHA10-12 is required)
RT-3D (the SOP-ALPHA10-4 is required)
Ver.6.0~ Analog PW Doppler (the hardware is required)

M, D-mode Display Moving Bar Display (Scrolling is not available)

Sweep Speed: 7 steps
~Ver.4 (17.5, 11.6, 8.7, 5.8, 4.4, 2.9, 2.2 cm/sec)
Ver.5~ (200.0, 150.0, 100.0, 66.7, 50.0, 33.3, 25.0 mm/sec)
Possible on both real time and frozen image.
THE, CHE-mode Display THE (PHE, ePHD)
CHE (PHD, Harmonic Power Flow, ePHD)
Ver.7~ Transmission with selected MI value
Ver.7~ Direct select function to ePHD mode

Diagnostic Distance 0.5+30cm (Each probe has a diagnostic limit)

~Ver.4 1.0cm step (0.5cm step at 0.5cm ~ 2.0cm)
Possible to set selectable range up as each preset
Ver.5~ 0.5cm/0.75cm/1.0cm/1.5cm/2.0cm/2.5cm/3.0cm/
3.5cm4.0cm/4.5cm and 1.0 cm step at 5.0cm~.

4-1
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

Display modes
Electronic 3D Phased Mechanical Mechanical
Electronic 3D Convex Independent
Linear/ Array Sector Radial
Sector Sector CW
Convex Sector
B, B-Zoom, 2B " " " " $ " "
B (F), B (PF),
B(F)-Zoom,
" " " " $ $ $
B(PF)-Zoom
2B(F), 2B(PF)
4B(F), 4B(PF) " " " " $ $ $
4B, B/M " " " " $ "(*1) $
B(F)/M(F)
" " " " $ $ $
B(PF)/M(PF)
B/PW Doppler
B(F)/PW Doppler " " " " $ $ $
B(PF)/PW Doppler
B/CW Doppler
B(F)/CW Doppler $ "(*1) $ "(*1) $ $ $
B(PF)/CW Doppler
M " " " " $ " $
M(F), M(PF) " " " " $ $ $
PW Doppler " " " " $ $ $
CW Doppler $ " $ " " $ $
B(VOL " $ " " $ $ $
B/VOL $ $ " " $ $ $
": Possible, $: Impossible, (*1): No Duplex/Triplex
F: Flow, PF: Power Flow
- The EU-9110 is required for connection of Independent probe.
- The EU-9109 or EU-9124 is required for connection of Mechanical probe.
- The SOP-ALPHA-4 is required to use Real Time 3D function.

Probe Frequency
Electronic Probes Selection is possible by Image Freq.
Mechanical Probes Ver.4.0~ Selection is possible by Image Freq.
Independent Ver.3.0~ 2MHz, 5MHzTransmission Frequency
Electronic Probes 1.25MH* ~ 13MHz
(Each probe has a frequency limit)
Ver.7.0~ Frequency is selectable for manual flash function
(the condition of Low MI/Flash type: strong only)
Mechanical Probes Ver.4.0~ 6.0MHz ~ 15.0MHz
(Each probe has a frequency limit)
Independent Ver.3.0~ 2.14MHz, 5MHz
(Each probe has a frequency limit)

4-2
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

Transmission Method
Electronic Probes Compound Pulse Wave transmission
(Maximum number of burst wave is 8 waves)
Transmission Apodalization
Real-time transmission voltage control
Ver.4.1~ Active CW transmission crystal is changed alternatively
time by time (specific probe only)
Mechanical Probes Ver.4.0~ Single transmission

Transmission Voltage
Electronic Probes Max. ±60V
(CW transmission voltage: Max. 12V)
Mechanical Probes Ver.4.0~ Max. 105V
(In the case of Annular-array probe: 97V)
Independent Probes Ver.3.0~ Max. 9.0V

Transmission Power Control Transmission voltage is controlled by an operation panel

Output is controlled by acoustic power and temperature
rise
Ver.7.0~ Power limit on OBST application (Only for USA model)
Ver.7.0~ Power limit override function (Only for USA model)

Transmission Voltage Monitoring The transmission voltage setting value is monitored by

the CPU, which also stops transmission and cut off
transmission power supply output.

Focus System
Selection for default focal position of Auto 1P (Ver.7.0~)
Electronic Linear/Convex
Transmission: 4 point max. (selectable from 16 points) + Acoustic lens
Reception Continuously variable + Acoustic lens
1.5D Array Electric Linear
Transmission: 4 point max. (selectable from 16 points) + Acoustic lens
Reception Continuously variable + Acoustic lens (Variable aperture)
Electronic Sector
Transmission: 4 point max. (selectable from 8 points) + Acoustic lens
Reception Continuously variable + Acoustic lens
Mechanical probes (Ver.4~)
Concave-surface element
In the case of Annular-array probe,
Transmission: 2 point max. (selectable from 4 points)
Reception: Continuous

Receiving Addition System

Electronic Probes and Annular-array probes
Digital Beam Former
Mechanical probes Ver.4.0~ Analog

Receiving System
Receiving Apodization
Receiving Multiprocessing
B/W: Max. 4 direction
(8 beams processing is possible by the combination with
Bi-directional simultaneous reception)
Color: Max. 4 direction
(Bi-directional simultaneous reception is standard)

4-3
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

Image Quality Adjustment

B Gain ~Ver.5 30~90dB (60/256 dB Step)
Ver.6.0~ 10~90dB (40/256 dB Step)
Possible on both real time and frozen image.
M Gain ±30dB (60/256 dB Step) from B Gain Settings
Possible on both real time and frozen image.
STC 8-level slide variable resistor (0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 12, 18 cm)
* Provided as digital information from the operation
panel.
Ver.3~ Possible to record STC curve for each view durting the
Stress-mode.
Ver.7~ STC Memory (possible to keep the STC curve)
Contrast 16 steps (B, M independent, dB display)
23 steps, Selectable from contrast display (C1~C23) or
dynamic range display (D36~D96, dB)
Possible on both real time and frozen image.
~Ver.4.0 Changed dynamic range against black level.
Ver..4.1~ Changed dynamic range against middle brightness.
AGC 16 steps (B, M independent)
~Ver.3.0 “Relief” and “FTC” function integrate into “AGC”.
Ver.4.0~ “Relief” and “FTC” are independent of “AGC”
FTC (Ver.4.0~) On/Off
Relief (Ver.4.0~) OFF/Low/Mid/High
Frame Correlation 16 levels (Both B/W and Color)
Line Correlation 16 levels (Both B/W and Color)
Post Process 5 types (Linear/Slope1/Slope2/Slope3/Reject)
Gamma correction View Gamma: 5 types (Linear/A/B/C/D)
+ User table: 1 type (User)
Ver.4.1~ View Gamma: 9 types (Linear/A/B/C/D/E/F/G/H)
Scanning line density Variable in accordance with the diagnostic distance and
zoom settings.
Steered Beam Max. ±30º (5º steps, special probe only)
Max ±20º (5º steps) for B/W
Flow, Doppler and B/W independent
Image Frequency Select 4 types (High, Resolution, Standard, Penetration)
Image Process Select Various image quality adjustment change in the lump.

Adaptive Image Processing (Ver.6~)

Speckle noise reduction and Edge enhancement function
Ver.7~ possible to configure parameter mode independent
(the hardware and SOP-ALPHA10-24 are required
depending on S/N)

Edge Optimizer (Ver.6~) Speckle noise reduction and Edge enhancement function
(the hardware is required depending on S/N)

Image Optimizer (Ver.7~) Quick adjustment function for B-gain, STC and angle gain

4-4
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

Spectral Doppler
Applicable probe PW: Electrical linear/convex/sector
CW: Electrical sector
Frequency Analysis System FFT system
Display Power spectrum
Frequencies PW Doppler ......1.88, 2.14, 2.5, 3, 3.75, 5, 6, 7.5 MHz
CW Doppler......1.88, 2.14, 3.75 MHz
Analysis rate (Velocity Range) There are limits depending on the probe frequency
PW Doppler: ±6.22 ~ 398.4 cm/sec
CW Doppler: ±8.30 ~ 796.2 cm/sec
Sample Point 1 point
Sampling Volume 0.5 ~ 20 mm (0.5mm, 1mm, 2mm Step)
Filters Auto
PW Doppler: 0 ~ ±1/4PRF Hz 12 levels
CW Doppler: 0 ~ ±1/4PRF Hz 12levels
Manual
PW Doppler: Approx. 50,100,200,400,800,1600 Hz
CW Doppler: Approx. 50,100,200,400,800,1600 Hz
Doppler Gain 0 ~ 50.00 dB, 128 step
Possible on both real time and frozen image.
Contrast ~Ver.5.0 16 Levels
Ver.6.0~ 23 Levels
Possible on both real time and frozen image.
Audio output Speaker and VCR output, stereo
Base Line Shift Possible on both real time and frozen image.
(It does not possible to change in the Doppler and M
modes. And it does not affect to both recorder output
and Physiological Signal.)
Spectrum Invert Possible on both real time and frozen image.
Interpolation processing for missing Doppler information
Yes (MSE)
Frame rate improvement function in the B/D-mode
Yes (Pulse by Pulse transmission))
Doppler sound output in B Mode image display
Yes (PW Sound ON)
Angle Correct 0 ~ 80°
The angle correction also follows automatically with
inversion of steered
Ver.7~ Auto Angle Correct (Auto Doppler angle correction
function)
B-Refresh 1sec, 2sec, 4sec, 6sec, 8sec
R-Wave is not update.

4-5
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

Color Flow
Frequency Estimation System Auto-correlation method
Display Velocity
Variance
Velocity/Variance
Power Flow
Directional Power Flow
Ver.2.1~ eFlow (For Lite version, the SOP-ALPHA10-4 is required)
Ver.2.1~ Tissue Doppler Image
Ver.3.0~ BETA(TDI Power)
Ver.4.0~ Directional eFlow
(For Lite version, the SOP-ALPHA10-4 is required)
Ver.7.0~ Frame by Frame transmission on B/Flow mode
Ver.7.0~ Velocity scale indication on the color bar at the
Directional Power Flow and eFlow
Flow Gain 0 ~ 31.75dB (0.25dB step, 128 levels)
Possible on both real time and frozen image.
Frequencies 1.88, 2.14, 2.5, 3, 3.75, 5, 6, 7.5 MHz
(There are limits depending on the probe)
Velocity Range ±6.22 ~ 159.4 cm/s
(There are limits depending on the probe frequency)
Depth of Field Max. 30cm
(There are limits depending on the probe frequency)
Sampling Changes in accordance with the depth range.
Decimation B mode: 1~8, B(eFlow)-mode: max 16
M mode: None
Average B-Flow mode: 3 types (Low/Mid/High)
M-flow mode: Fixed
Flow Filter 6 types
Ver.4.0~ 8 types (2types for eFlow)
Spatial Filter ~Ver.4.0 7 types
Ver.5.0~ 16 types
Pixel Smooth ~Ver.5.0 3 types
Ver.6.0~ 10 types
Rejection Motion Reject 4 types (~Ver.4.0) / 16 types (Ver.5.0)
/ 32 types (Ver.6~)
Color Reject ±16 steps
Color image accumulation display Yes (Color Capture)
Color edge Smooth Yes
Color Coding Max 5 types for each application.
Max 5 types for user settings.
Notch Filter Ver.5.0~ Yes
Vertical line noise rejection during parallel receiving
(eFlow/CHE power mode: always ON)

Advanced Wall-motion Reduction (Ver.6~)

Wall-modtion filter for eFlow
(the SOP-ALPHA10-34 is required depending on S/N)

4-6
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

DIU
Image Gradation B/W: 8bit, 256 steps
Velocity: 8bit, ±127 steps
Variance: 4bit, 16 steps
Power Flow: 7bit, 128 steps
Displayable Scanning Lines Max 1024 lines
Display Memory B/W: 1024 × 512 × 8 bit × 2 planes
Velocity/Power: 1024 × 512 × 8 bit × 2 planes
Variance: 1024 × 512 × 4 bit × 2 planes
Cine Memory B/W: 512 × 65536 × 8 bit
Ver.3~ 512 × 524288 × 8 bit
Ver.3~ 512 × 1048576 × 8 bit (In Stress scanning)
Velocity/Power: 512 × 65536 × 8 bit
Ver.3~ 512 × 524288 × 8 bit
Variance: 512 × 65536 × 4 bit
Ver.3~ 512 × 524288 × 8 bit
Property: 512 × 65536 × 4 bit
Graphic: 16 × 458752 × 16 bit
Ver.3~ 16 × 1835008 × 16 bit
Image Display Synchronization Method
Ultrasound frame sync.
Ping Pong system ON/OFF selectable
Cine Memory Function
Search/Loop Max. 512 (Ver.3~: Max. 4096) frames
(with 120 scanning lines)
Playable simultaneous loop/in-loop on 2B and 4B images
Possible store/review to the media from cine memory
2B mapping
Possible to divide cine memory into 4 on 2B mode
Real-time storing (Ver.6~)
Possible to keep the data on the cine memory by manual
flash for CHE mode (Ver.7~)
Video Clip Auto Stop function (Ver.7~)
Scroll Max. 256 (Ver.3~: Max. 3584) Screens
(with 512 Pixels per screen)
Image Display Functions
B/* mode Up/Down Left-Right Display Possible
B mode Image Zoom Write Zoom possible
Read Zoom possible
(During Freeze × 16, Max.)
Position Movement Yes
Left-Right/Up-Down Inversion Yes
90° Rotation Display Yes
M mode image Window Display Yes
Echo Erase Yes
Request Function (Display mode change after Freeze)
Yes
Steered Beam Yes (Possible to configure on B-mode
and Flow-mode individually)
FAM (Free angular M-mode) Possible on both B/W and color image (Possible on
frozen image)
Possible on B/M upper/lower display

4-7
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

Possible on review image (Ver.5~)

Improvement of FAM display speed (Ver.6~)
(The SOP-ALPHA10-5 is required)
2B Image, Black and White/Color Real-time Display
Yes(DDD mode)
CHE 2B display function Possible to set up right/left display on intermittent-mode
or Monitor view-mode
Synchronized search function
Request function after frozen monitor mode image (Ver.4.0~)
B Image Erase function (Ver.4.0~)
Color Agent Display function (Ver.5.0~)
Synchronized search function on DDM mode (Ver.7.0~)
(Monitor Cine partition “1:1” only)
Direct select function to DDM mode (Ver.7.0~)
(The CHM-ALPHA10 is required)
Doppler mode Image B/W Reversal Display
Yes (Possible on both real time and
frozen image)
B/W, Color Display Priority Function Yes (BW: 0~63, COL:0~128)
Color Display of B/W image Yes
VTR playback measurement Yes (only Manual Calibration)
Large Display format (Vertical size) Yes
Ver.5.0~ Plane mode
Ver.6.0~ M mode
Ver.6.0~ RT3D mode
(the hardware is required depending
on S/N)
Spatial Compound (Ver.6.0~) Yes
(the SOP-ALPHA10-22 is required depending on S/N)
Ver.6.0~ Available on electrical linear
Ver.7.0~ Available on electrical convex
Ver.7.0~ Addition of high frame compound
Trapezoidal scan (Ver.7.0~) Yes
Sector-linear hybrid scan method
Digital Data backup/output
Still image output format DICOM Palette
RGB plane
RGB pixel (Ver.7~)
Monochrome 2 (Ver.7~)
BMP
JPEG
TIFF
Multi-image output format (the SOP-ALPHA10-2 is required)
Video Clip DICOM JPEG
Ver.4~ Real-time video clip acquiring
Ver.6~ Non-interlaced multi frame image
Ver.7~ Re-capturing with single frame
AVI
MS-MPEG4 Codec
Motion JPEG Codec (Ver.7~)
Line ALOKA private
Ver.5~ Re-capturing specified loop

4-8
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

Ver.5~ Re-capturing with Video clip format

Ver.5~ Re-capturing single frame with measurement result
Ver.5~ Convert Line data to DICOM multi-frame
Ver.7~ Possible to adjust image parameter at playback the data
Backup Media
DICOM Server/Printer
(the SOP-ALPHA10-10 is required)
~M01530 HDD, MO, CD-R, FD
M01531~ HDD, DVD-RAM, CD-R, FD
Ver.5~ USB flash memory (the JB-284 is required)
M01531~ USB flash memory (standard)
Others
Ver.4~ Possible to define file format for each media individually
Ver.6~ Available disk space display for each devices
Ver.6~ Real-time storing
Ver.6~ Beep sound for digital printing
Ver.7~ Beep sound for end of manual storing
Ver.7~ Auto image deletion function (HDD only)

Information management
Patient database in the equipment Backup/Restore the database to/from the media
Search the patient information from the internal hard disk,
Floppy disk and MO disk
DICOM (the SOP-LPHA10-10 is required)
Read/Search the patient list information (worklist) from
HIS(Hospital Information System)
Ver.3~ Support IHE integration Profile (SWF, PIR)
Ver.5~ Support IHE integration Profile (PDI)
Ver.5~ Support IHE intehration profile (ED)
Correspond to Comprehensive SR for OB-GYN
(the SOP-ALPHA10-20 is required)
Ver.6~ Correspond to Comprehensive SR for Vascular and
Echocardiography
(the SOP-ALPHA10-20 is required)
Ver.7.0~ Addition Abdomen data to Vascular SR
(the SOP-ALPHA10-20 is required)
Ver.7.0~ Correspond to Line data storage for DICOM server
Personal information protection
User authentication function (Ver.5~)
Teaching File (Ver.6~)

4-9
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

Display information
Language English
Auto Display date, time, Imaging frequency (Ver.7~: Reception
frequency for harmonic), Image Direction mark,
diagnostic distance, Gain, Contrast, Frame Rate,
Transmission voltage (% display), Focus Mark, Velocity
Range, Heart Rate (Ver.7~: Stabile heart rate display),
R-Delay, BSA/GW/PSA, Maximum Velocity, Velocity
Scale, Doppler Angle correction, Preset Name, Acoustic
Power%MI, TI&, Timer display, Study time display
Ver.4~ Temperature display for Motorized TEE probe
Ver.5~ Sonographer name display, Model name of puncture
adapter display
Ver.6~ Respiration bar display
(Ver.7~: Automatic changed to the seep display after
freeze the image)
Ver.7~ L & R indication on the body mark display
Addition of graphics for Line data
Support to display the “Timer counter” at playback the
Line data
Character Input Hospital Name, Patient number (ID), Patient Name,
Patient age, Gender, Height, Weight, Body surface area,
pregnancy week, Comments(Movable using a trackball),
Annotation characters (Movable using a trackball)
Ver.5~ Addition of Virtual keboard for ID input
Graphic Display Range Mark, Time Mark, Velocity Mark, Puncture Guide
Line(display depth indicator), Body
Mark(user-configurable), Cursor (includes Sample Gate,
M-Window and Angle Mark), Flow Area mark, Cine
search mark, Multi-plane mark, Timer display (CHE,
Stress), VCR counter
Ver.4~ Grid for Brachytherapy, Puncture guide line angle,
Sample Volume information
Ver.7~ Addition of the display icon for Broadband Harmonic,
AIP and Spatial Compound

Measuring Function
B mode Basic Measurements Distance Measurement, Area/Circumference length
measurement, Volume measurement (Ver.4~: Auto trace
of a cavity by designating 3 points), Angle measurement,
Histogram measurement, Hip J Angle measurement,
Index measurement
M mode Basic Measurements Length measurement (Ver.4~: Addition of new marks),
Time Measurement(Ver.7~: Addition of new mark), Heart
rate measurement, Velocity measurement (Ver.4~:
Addition of new marks), Index measurement (Ver.4~:
Addition of new marks)
D mode Basic Measurements Blood flow velocity measurement, Time measurement,
Heart rate measurement, Acceleration(deceleration)
measurement, RI, Pressure half time measurement, D.
Caliper 1/2, Index measurement, Mean velocity, PI, Steno
flow measurement, Regurgitation flow measurement, D.
Trace 1/2
B/D mode Basic Measurements Blood flow measurement(Ver.7~: Addition of automatic

4 - 10
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

transcribe function)
Ver.3~: Flow Volume (VTI)
B(Flow) mode Basic Measurement Blood flow measurement (Flow Profile)
(the SOP-ALPHA10-7 is required)
Obstetrical Measurements
B mode GA measurement (gestational week, Ver.4~: Automatic
calculation of AC, HC, FTA, AD and AXT), FW
measurement (Fetus Weight), Fetus Ratio measurement,
Amniotic Fluid Index, Cardio Thoracic Area Ratio,
Cervix
M, D mode Fetus Heart Rate
B, M mode Fetus cardiac function
D mode Fetus Doppler
Report Amniotic Fluid Puncture, BPP Scoring, Anatomy CL
Gynecological Measurements
B mode Uterus measurement, Cervix measurement, Ovary
measurement, Bladder measurement
Ver.3~: Follicles measurement(Ver.5~: 3 axis volume
measurement)
D mode Ovarian artery measurement, Uterine Artery measurement,
GYN Doppler measurement
Vascular (Peripheral Vascular) Measurements
B mode % Stenosis-Diameter measurement, % Stenosis-Area
measurement, mean-IMT measurement, max-IMT
measurement
D mode Carotid Artery study measurement, Upper/Lower
Extremity Artery Study measurement, Upper/Lower
Extremity Venous Study measurement, PV Doppler
measurement
Ver.4~: TCD Measurement
Cardiac Measurements
B mode Left Ventricular function measurement (Ver.4~:
Auto-trace of Left Ventricular Cavity by designating 3
points), Aortic Valve Area measurement, Mitral Valve
Area measurement, Right Ventricular Diameter
measurement, Left Atrial Diameter/Aortic root Diameter
measurement, IVS/LVPW ratio measurement, Left
ventricular mass measurement, Inferior Vena Cava
measurement
Ver.6~: LA/RA volume measurement
M mode Left Ventricular function measurement, Mitral Valve
measurement, Tricuspid Value measurement, Pulmonary
Value measurement, Left Atrial Diameter/Aortic root
Diameter measurement, Inferior Vena Cava measurement
Ver.6~: CRT(Asynchrony) measurement
D mode Left ventricular out(Ver.7~: Addition of BSA, SVI and
COI), Aortic stenosis flow measurement, Aortic
regurgitant flow measurement, Right ventricular outflow
tract measurement(Ver.7~: Addition of BSA, SVI and
COI), Pulmonary stenosis flow measurement, Pulmonary
regurgitant flow measurement, Trance Mitral flow
measurement, Mitral stenosis flow measurement, Mitral
regurgitant flow measurement, Tricuspid stenosis flow

4 - 11
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

measurement, Pulmonary vein flow measurement

Ver.2.1~: Coronary measurement
Ver.6~: CRT(Asynchrony) measurement
B(f)/D mode PISA measurement
Ver.3~ Power mode BETA measurement
TDI M mode M TDI measurement
Ver.3~: midwall FS measurement,
M TDI WT(LVPW), (IVS) measurement
TDI PW mode TDI PW measurement
Abdominal Measurements
B mode Gallbladder measurement, CBD measurement, Liver
measurement, Pancreas measurement, Renal
measurement, Spleen measurement, Space-occupying
lesion measurement(Ver.7~: Addition of volume
measurement and graph display function), Blood vessel
diameter measurement, % stenosis measurement
D mode Artery measurement, Renal Artery measurement, Portal
vein measurement, Shunt blood vessel measurement
Urological Measurements
B mode PSA measurement, Seminal Vesicles measurement,
Bladder measurement, Testicle measurement, Renal
measurement
D mode Renal Artery measurement
Special Measurements
Extended Field of View
(the SOP-ALPHA10-1 is required)
Expanded displsy size (Ver.6~)
Addition of measurement function (Ver.6~)
Addition of body mark display (Ver.7.0~)
Addition of Color flow EFV
Real-Time Doppler Auto Trace
(the SOP-ALPHA10-3 is required)
Real-Time 3D (the SOP-ALPHA10-4 is required)
RT3D B-mode section measurement (Ver.4~)
Reconstruction the volume data from HDD (Ver.4~)
Reconstruction the volume data with DICOM format (Ver.5~)
ECG display after freeze the image (Ver.5~)
Automatic volume measurement (Ver.5~)
(the SOP-ALPHA10-20 is required)
Expanded display size (Ver.6~, Only CPU board EP5353)
Inversion mode (Ver.6~)
Possible to transfer the AVM result to other measurement
(the SOP-ALPHA10-20 is required)
Color Flow 3D
(the SOP-ALPHA10-35 is required)
(the hardware is required depending on S/N)
Ver.3~ eTracking (the SOP-ALPHA10-11 is required)
CSV file output for ET measurement value (Ver.4~)
Configurable the parameter for B/W transmission
individually (Ver.6~)
Vessel diameter display on the acquisition screen (Ver.7~)
Expansion of wave form (Ver.7~)
Expansion of range for zoom and move function (Ver.7~)
Selectable the R-wave detection method (Ver.7~)

4 - 12
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

Addition of function to avoid R-wave (Ver.7~)

Addition of R-wave polarity reversal function (Ver.7~)
Addition of wave form of primary derivation (Ver.7~)
Addition of setup method for manual AI value (Ver.7~)
Addition of raw data output (Ver.7~)
Ver.3~ BETA(Backscattered Energy Temoral Analysis)
Ver.4~ Brachytherapy grid display
(Possible with UST-678)
Ver.5~ FMD analysis (the SOP-ALPHA10-16 is required)
Corresponded to auto blood pressure monitor (Ver.6~)
Expansion of wave form (Ver.7~)
Expansion of range for zoom and move function (Ver.7~)
Selectable the R-wave detection method (Ver.7~)
Addition of function to avoid R-wave (Ver.7~)
Addition of R-wave polarity reversal function (Ver.7~)
Addition of wave form of primary derivation (Ver.7~)
Addition of raw data output (Ver.7~)
Ver.6~ Wave Intensity (the SOP-ALPHA10-25 is required)
Vessel diameter display on the acquisition screen (Ver.7~)
Selectable the R-wave detection method (Ver.7~)
Addition of wave form of primary derivation (Ver.7~)
Corresponded to the WI report (Ver.7~)
Report Functions Report/Edit, Paste US image, Exam. data history(Ver.4~:
Waveform display), Output(Ver.3.0~: CSV file output for
OB-GYN, Ver.5.0~: SR output for OB-GYN, Ver.6~: SR
output for Cardio/Vascular, Ver.7~: SR output for
Abdomen), Auto Highlight abnormal values, Basic
Report,
Ver.3~: Anatomy Check List(OB, GYN, PV)
Ver.7~: Flip function of drawing for Plaque Score block
indication (Vascular)

Data Analysis Function

Ver.3~ CHE analysis (the SOP-ALPHA10-14 is required)
Ver.3~ TDI analysis (Include Strain)
(the SOP-ALPHA10-13B is required)
Ver.3~ Stress Echo (the SOP-ALPHA10-15B is required)
Pause protocol (Ver.4~)
Stress Echo data archive (Ver.4~)
Addition of 17 segment scoring (Ver.5~)
Stress Echo analysis data archive (Ver.5~)
Ver.4~ KI/A-SMA, CQ and WT (the EU-9100 is required)
Analysis is possible with the data stored in the cine
memory or HDD including retrieved data from
removable media (Ver.5~)

4 - 13
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

Input-Output Signal
Digital data Input-Output
USB USB2.0 × 6ch
RS-232C For ALK-3 communication 1 System
IEEE1394 For DV video output 1 System
(Option: M00951~, the PM-A10-H006 and PM-A10-H007 are required)
Analog video Input-Output
Composite output for B/W video printer 1 System
Control signal (PRINT/BUSY) 1 System
Composite output for color video printer/VCR
Color Composite 1 System
Color video printer Output
Y/C 1 System
Control signal (PRINT/BUSY) 1 System
VTR Output
Y/C 1 System
Audio L/R 1 System
VTR Input
Y/C 1 System
Audio L/R 1 System
VTR control signal (SVO-9500MD2/MDP2, RS-232C) 1 System
Ver.4~: Addition of control command for DVD(JVC, Sony)
Microphone Input Monaural 1 System

Digital video Output (Ver.4~: Option)

DVI connector ~M00950 1 System
(Option: the PM-A10-H001 or PM-A10-H001B is required)
DVI connector M00951~ 2 Systems
(Option: the PM-A10-H006 is required)
Viewing Monitor
17-inch Color CRT Monitor (~M01590)
Resolution: SVGA, Refresh frequency: 50/75Hz
19-inch Color LCD Monitor (M01591~: standard, ~M01590: Option)
Resolution: SVGA
(Option: ~M00950: PM-A10-H001* and PM-A10-H008 are required
M00951~: PM-A10-H006 and PM-A10-H008 are required)

Power Supply Unit

Power Supply Voltage
100 Volt System AC 100 ~ 120V ± 10%
200 Volt System AC 200 ~ 240V ± 10%
Service Receptacle (AC outlet)
Printers, VCR and other (Total Max. 350VA) 2 Systems

Power Consumption Max. 1200VA

4 - 14
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

Dimensions 580mm (W), 1095 ~ 1190mm(D),

CRT model: 1440 ~ 1570mm(H)
LCD model: 1460 ~ 1650mm(H)

Weight Approx. 210kg (Standard Configuration)

Approx. 203kg
(Ver.5~ Standard Configuration)

Classification for the protection against surges Class 1 Device

Classification for the degree of protection against surges BF type

Use Environment Room Temperature +10 ~ 40ºC

3D probes: +15 ~ 40ºC
Relative Humidity 30 ~ 75%
Air Pressure 700 ~ 1060hPa

4 - 15
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

Major Options
Photographic Equipment
B/W Video Printer (Analog) UP-895MD / UP-895CE / UP-895MD/SYN
UP-897MD / UP-897CE / UP-897MD/SYN
P93 / P93W / P93E

B/W Video Printer (Digital)

Ver.3~ UP-D897
Ver.6~ P93D / P93DW

Color Video Printer (Analog) UP-21MD / UP-21MD(CED)

CP900 / CP900UM / CP900E

Color Video Printer (Digital)

Ver.3~ UP-23MD / CP900D / CP900DW
Ver.6~ CP30D / CP30DW

VTR SVO-9500MD2 / SVO-9500MDP2

HS-MD3000E(2) / HS-MD3000U(2)

DVD recorder (Ver.4~)

DVO-1000MD(Sony), BD-X201ME(JVC)
DV-800
Ver.6~ DV-800(B)

PC printer
HP Deskjet5600
Ver.3~ HP Deskjet5740
Canon PIXMA iP4000
Ver.4.1~ Canon PIXMA iP4200
Ver.6~ Canon PIXMA iP4300

Physiological Signal Display Unit PEU-ALPHA10*

Display Information ECG(or DC IN)
PCG
PULSE(or DC IN)
Respiration
Sensitivity/Position Variable
Possible to setup the position on
B-mode and sweep mode
independently (Ver.7~)
Sweep Speed 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 (Sec/Frame)

Contrast harmonic Echo Module (Ver.2.1~) CHM-ALPHA10

Independent probe connection unit (Ver.3~) EU-9110

Mechanical scanning probe connection unit (Ver.4~) EU-9109 (M01705 and before)
EU-9124 (M01706 and after)

Comprehensive Cardiac Analysis unit (KI, A-SMA, CQ, WT) (ver.4~)

EU-9100

USB extension box (Ver.5~, M01530 and before) JB-284

Foot switch MP-2345B

3-channels Foot switch MP-2614B

4 - 16
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

4-2 System Configuration

This ultrasound diagnostic machine (SSD-ALPHA10) consists of those units below

Main body PSC-138*
USM-28*
Tx/Rx part
Digital Beam Former part
Flow/Doppler part
DIU part

Operation Panel L-KEY-84*

Viewing monitor IPC-1710* (CRT type, ~M01590)
IPF-1901 (LCD type, M01591~)
Power supply unit PSU-ALPHA10
Storage drive unit EU-9098*
CW Doppler Unit UCW-ALPHA10
Physiological signal display unit PEU-ALPHA10*
(SSD-ALPHA10 S/N: M00181~: Option)
Host Interface unit EU-9102 (Lite version: Option)
B/W printer fixtures MP-FX-ALPHA10-1 (~M00850)
MP-FX-ALPHA10-1B (M00851~)
Color printer/VCR/DVD fixtures MP-FX-ALPHA10-2B (~M00950)
MP-FX-ALPHA10-2C (M00951~)

Optional devices
Mounting fixtures for DVO-1000MD
MP-FX-ALPHA10-5
(Option for S/N of SSD-ALPHA10 M00111~M00348,
M00352~M00476)
Mounting fixtures for UP-895* MP-FX-ALPHA10-6
(Option for S/N of SSD-ALPHA10 M00851~)
Power Switch cover for SVO-9500*
MP-FX-ALPHA10-7
(Option for S/N of SSD-ALPHA10 M00851~)
B/W video printer
NTSC UP-895MD, UP-897MD, P93W
PAL UP-895CE, UP-897CE, P93E
Worldwide UP-895MD/SYN, UP-897MD/SYN
Digital (Ver.3.0~) UP-D897, P93DW
Color video printer
NTSC UP-21MD(CED), CP900UM
PAL UP-21MD(CED), CP900E
Digital (Ver.3.0~) UP-D23MD, CP900DW, CP30DW
VCR
NTSC SVO-9500MD2, HS-MD3000U(2)
PAL SVO-9500MDP2, HS-MD3000E(2)

4 - 17
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

DVD recorder (Ver.4.0~)

JVC BD-X201ME
& Analog connection (S-Video):
Outside the USA: L-CABLE0756 is required
USA: RS-232C straight cable 9pin (Male,
inch-scale-screw) – 25pin (Female,
mm-scale-screw) is required
& DV connection (M00951~):
Outside the USA: PM-A10-H006, PM-A10-H007 and
L-CABLE0756 are required
USA: PM-A10-H006, PM-A10-H007 and RS-232C
straight cable 9pin (Male, inch-scale-screw) –
25pin (Female, mm-scale-screw) are required
Sony DVO-1000MD
& Analog connection (S-Video):
RS-232C straight cable 9pin (Female, inch-scale-screw) – 25pin
(Female, mm-scale-screw) is required
& DV connection (M00951~):
PM-A10-H006, PM-A10-H007 and R RS-232C straight cable
9pin (Female, inch-scale-screw) – 25pin (Female,
mm-scale-screw) are required
ALOKA DV-800
~M00950: PM-A10-H001 or PM-A10-H001B is required
* Both DV-800 and LCD monitor are not available
simultaneously.
M00951~: PM-A10-H006 and PM-A10-H009 or PM-A10-H009B
are required
DV-800(B), Ver.6~
~M00950: PM-A10-H001B is required
* Both DV-800(B) and LCD monitor are not available
simultaneously.
M00951~: PM-A10-H006 and PM-A10-H009B are required
Foot switch MP-2345B
3-channels Foot switch MP-2614B
Contrast Harmonic Echo module (Ver.2.1~) CHM-ALPHA10
Independent probe connection unit (Ver.3.0~) EU-9110
Cine memory expansion unit (Ver.3.0~) EU-9103
(SSD-ALPHA10 S/N: ~M00200 : Option)
Mechanical scanning probe connection unit (Ver.4.0~)
EU-9109 (S/N: M01705 and before)
EU-9124 (S/N: M01706 and after)
Comprehensive Cardiac Analysis unit (KI, A-SMA, CQ, WT) (Ver.4.0~)
EU-9100
USB extension box (Ver.5.0~, ~M01530) JB-284
* Both JB-284 and DV-800* are not
available simultaneously.

4 - 18
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

Software option package

Extended Filed of View SOP-ALPHA10-1
* For Lite version, the EU-9102 is required
Motion JPEG SOP-ALPHA10-2
* For Lite version, the EU-9102 is required
Real Time Doppler Auto Trace SOP-ALPHA10-3
Real Time 3D SOP-ALPHA10-4
* For Lite version, the EU-9102 is required
Free Angular M-mode Function SOP-ALPHA10-5
Flow Profile Measurement SOP-ALPHA10-7
TEI Index Measurement SOP-ALPHA10-8
DICOM Communication SOP-ALPHA10-10
eTracking Analysis SOP-ALPHA10-11 (Ver.3.0~)
eFlow SOP-ALPHA10-12 (Only for Lite version)
TDI/Strain Analysis SOP-ALPHA10-13B (Ver.3.0~)
* Myocardial thickness(B) measurement is available
from Ver.4
CHE Analysis SOP-ALPHA10-14 (Ver.3.0~)
Stress Echo SOP-ALPHA10-15B (Ver.3.0~)
* For S/N M00200 and before, the EU-9103 is
required
* Stress Echo analysis is available form Ver.4
eTracking & FMD Analysis SOP-ALPHA10-16 (Ver.5.0~)
Automatic Volume Measurement SOP-ALPHA10-20 (Ver.5.0~)
* SOP-ALPHA10-4 is required
* For Lite version, the EU-9102 is required
DICOM Structured Report SOP-ALPHA10-21 (Ver.5.0~)
* SOP-ALPHA10-10 is required
Olympus Ultrasonic Gastrovideoscope connection (Convex sector type)
SOP-ALPHA10-17 (Ver.5.1~)
Olympus Ultrasonic Gastrovideoscope connection (Electronic radial type)
SOP-ALPHA10-18 (Ver.5.1~)
Spatial Compound SOP-ALPHA10-22 (Ver.6.0~)
* For S/N M00300 and before, the PM-A10-H002B is
required.
AIP SOP-ALPHA10-24 (Ver.6.0~)
* For S/N M01240 and before, the PM-A10-H002B is
required.
WI & eTracking SOP-ALPHA10-25 (Ver.6.0~)
Advanced Wall-motion Reduction SOP-ALPHA10-34 (Ver.6.0~)
* For S/N M00850 and before, the PM-A10-H010 is
required.

4 - 19
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

Flow 3D SOP-ALPHA10-35 (Ver.7.0~)

* the SOP-ALPHA10-4 is required.
* For Lite version, the EU-9102 isrequired.
* For S/N M01870 and before, the PM-A10-H013 is
required.

4-3 System Block Diagram

There are the lists of all PCB (Except Power supply unit and external peripherals) and the system
block diagram mentioned from the next page.

4 - 20
 SSD-ALPHA10 PCB LIST (1/3) ~Ver.2
SSD-ALPHA10 Unit/Module PCB Name Description
Main body PSC-138 EP4983 Audio Amp Amplifier for the sound. Control of loudness.
Main Panel L-KEY-84* Operation panel. It communicates with host CPU by USB 1.1 protocol.
Selecting probes, reading the probe ID, controlling HVS, codes of optional
Ultrasound Main Unit EP4948 Probe Selector
items and compound array probe.
USM-28 EP494901 Mech. Front End Tx/Rx circuits for IND probe, A/D conversion for STCW Doppler.
Transmission for electric probes %Including STCW transmitter&, primary
EP4950 Wave Generator
Pre AMP, receiver for STCW, 16ch%Including quadrature detector&
EP4996 Tx Generator Generating the waveform for transmission. 8ch.
Time Gain Control AMP (Adjusting the amplitude level of the signal at the
EP4951 Front End Control input of the Beam Former), generating Pre STC, controlling the motor of
Vol mode scanner.
EP4973 TD Jumper Jumper board between Probe Selector and Wave Generator.
EP4974 DBF Jumper Jumper board between Front End Control and Rx Beam Former.
EP4952 Rx Beam Former A/D conversion and digital delay. It has 32ch on a PCB.

4 - 21
Generating the base clock and timing signals for Tx/Rx, filtering for RF
EP4953 Timing Processor signal from DBF, quadrature detection (For Spectral/Color), transforming
of RF data to BLVDS.
SECTION 4

Processing of B/W and Spectral Doppler echo then transform it to BLVDS,

EP4954/EP5233 Beam Processor 1 processing of Echo Tracking and physio. signal then transform it to
BLVDS.
Processing of Color Flow signal %Velocity, Variance, Power, Property&
EP4955/EP5234 Beam Processor 2
and transform it to BLVDS.
Cine Memory function (Storing Line data temporally), scan conversion of
EP495600 Image Processor 1 US data, scan conversion of graphic data (Physio. signal and Echo
Tracking).
Post processing of image data from IP1, outputting video signal to monitor
EP4959 Video Processor
and interfacing I/O of peripheral equipment (Printer, VCR etc.).
EP4960 CPU Controlling entire system and generating graphics and characters signal.
EP4911 Backplane Motherboard.
Principle of System Operation
MN2-2008, Rev.2
 SSD-ALPHA10 PCB LIST (2/3) ~Ver.2 [Op]:Optional unit
SSD-ALPHA10 Unit/Module PCB Name Description
Ultrasound Main Unit EP5141 CPU I/O Relaying Ethernet/Parallel Port/Serial Port from host CPU.
SECTION 4

USM-28 Distributing video signal, supplying power to peripherals and proving

EP4915 Peripheral I/O
MN2-2008, Rev.2

interface for them.

EP4912 Power Supply I/O Controlling startup and shutting down system
EP4971 3.3V Power Supply unit Supplying +3.3V power.
Storage Drive Unit EU-9098* EP473203 Foot SW PCB Foot Switch connector.
EP5178 USB-ATA Converter Conversion of USB - ATA(IDE) protocol, relaying Foot Switch signal.
Viewing monitor IPC-1710* 17 inches color CRT monitor (SVGA)
Power Supply Unit Main Power unit EP5104 AC Line Filter Unit Line filter for AC input.
PSU-ALPHA10 EU-6030* EP5105 AC/DC Converter Unit High performance AC/DC converter (Improving power factor)
EP5106 DC/DC Converter Unit(1) DC +12V, DC +12V for cooling FAN
Principle of System Operation

EP5107 DC/DC Converter Unit(2) DC +24V, DC +5VSB

4 - 22
EP5108 Low Voltage Circuit(1) DC +5.1V, DC ± 5V
EP5109 Low Voltage Circuit(2) DC ±15V
EP5110 Motherboard Motherboard of power supply unit.
Sub Power unit EP5111 High Voltage Circuit(1) ± 70V
EU-6031* EP5127 High Voltage Circuit(2) ± 90V, HVB (0~+150V)
AC outlet Providing AC power for peripherals.
JB-274*(100V) EP5250 AC Outlet
JB-273*(200V)
Host Interface Unit JPEG encoding of video signal, processing of RT3D, EFV (Line data scan
EU-9102 EP4958 Image Processor 3 conversion).
[Op]Physio Signal Display unit Amplifier and A/D converter for physio. signal %ECG, PCG, Pulse,
PEU-ALPHA10* EP4997 Physio. AMP
Resp.&.
[Op]Cine memory expansion High-capacity Cine Memory function (Storing Line data temporally), scan
unit EU-9103 EP495601 Image Processor 1 conversion of US data, scan conversion of graphic data (Physio. signal and
Software ver.3 and higher Echo Tracking).
 SSD-ALPHA10 PCB LIST (3/3) Ver.2 [Op]:Optional unit
SSD-ALPHA10 Unit/Module PCB Name Description
[Op] IND probe connection Unit Cable with connectors, to connect Independent probe.
EU-9110
Software ver.3 and higher
[Op] Mechanical probe Tx/Rx circuits for IND probe, A/D conversion for STCW Doppler. Tx
connection Unit EU-9109 EP494900 Mecha Frontend circuit / Pre Amp / Transmission trigger / VBPF / Log Amp for
Software ver.4 and higher Mechanical probe.
EP5194 Mecha Connector Probe connector for mechanical probe
[Op] KI-SMA Unit Calculation of KI, A-SMA, CQ and WT, based on Black and White
EU-9100 EP4957 Image Processor 2 B-mode data.
Software ver.4 and higher
[Op] DV-800 connection kit Distributing digital video signal, and proving interface for DVD recorder
PM-A10-H001* EP5208 Peripheral I/O 2 DV-800* or LCD monitor.
Software ver.4 and higher
[Op] USB extension box Cable with connectors, to connect USB flash memory.
JB-284
Software ver.5 and higher
[Op] Viewing monitor 19 inches color LCD monitor (SVGA)
IPF-1901

4 - 23
SECTION 4
Principle of System Operation
MN2-2008, Rev.2
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

(Blank page)

4 - 24
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

FDD CD-RW MODrive

Foot SW (Option)
USB/ATA
Converter Foot SW
PCB
EU-9098

LAN RS232C IEEE1284

USI-153
Sector or
Linear or PSC-138
Convex
Jumper
TD

Jumper
DBF
Probe
WAVE GEN.1-3 F.E. Cont CPU I/O
Tx wave
D/A Gen
PROBE SEL
STC Seq.

LPF
16 Main Panel Assembly
Local Mecha
16
Gene Servo L-KEY-84*

A/D
Memory
Focus

Adder
Delay
MECHA F.E.
17inch

DBF1-3
Tx Pulse COL
Gen HostCPU Peripheral I/O Monitor
PRINTER
CONTROL

Adder
VBPF LOG B/W VIDEO IPC-1710(NTSC/PAL)
OUT
Clock HDD PRINTER
Divider CONTROL
B/W Printer(Option)
COL VIDEO
A/D OUT

Independent
VTR
Probe CONTROL

AUDIO
Beam Processor 1 IN R

Timing ET& Image Processor 1 Video Processor AUDIO COL Printer(Option)

Processor Phisyo DSP OUT R
CTRL Plane Over Video RGB
RF Cine DAC.
Select Mode DSC Lay Memory AUDIO
IN L
Processor Mecha Echo VCR
Plane Video
Mechanical Probe A/D Process Mode DSC Enc. AUDIO
Timing OUT L
Sector ID
Probe Control Echo Line Mode Video Y/C
VCR (Option)
Process DSC Dec. VIDEO
IN
Probe Physio
Y/C
Monitor DOP D/A & Mixer & VIDEO
Audio AMP OUT
Process WI Selector
COMP
VIDEO
Prn.&VCR OUT
%+'*)!&-,()..,-!$
EU-9102(OPTION) Control
Process
Control Plane iLink
Cine Mode DSC

Beam Processor 2 Line Mode ECG/RESP IN

DSC PCG IN
Flow
Process JPEG PULSE IN
Enc. Physio ECG DC IN
RF AMP PCG DC IN
Process iLink PEU-ALPHA10
Control Power
Back Plane Conv. I/O PSU-ALPHA10 (OPTION)

SSD-ALPHA10 ~Ver.2
TITLE MODEL 1
SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM SSD-ALPHA10 1

4 - 25
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

(Blank Page)

4 - 26
 SSD-ALPHA10 PCB LIST (1/3) Ver.3
SSD-ALPHA10 Unit/Module PCB Name Description
Main body PSC-138 EP4983 Audio Amp Amplifier for the sound. Control of loudness.
Main Panel L-KEY-84* Operation panel. It communicates with host CPU by USB 1.1 protocol.
Selecting probes, reading the probe ID, controlling HVS, codes of optional
Ultrasound Main Unit EP4948 Probe Selector
items and compound array probe.
USM-28 EP494901 Mech. Front End Tx/Rx circuits for IND probe, A/D conversion for STCW Doppler.
Transmission for electric probes %Including STCW transmitter&, primary
EP4950 Wave Generator
Pre AMP, receiver for STCW, 16ch%Including quadrature detector&
EP4996 Tx Generator Generating the waveform for transmission. 8ch.
Time Gain Control AMP (Adjusting the amplitude level of the signal at the
EP4951 Front End Control input of the Beam Former), generating Pre STC, controlling the motor of
Vol mode scanner.
EP4973 TD Jumper Jumper board between Probe Selector and Wave Generator.
EP4974 DBF Jumper Jumper board between Front End Control and Rx Beam Former.
EP4952 Rx Beam Former A/D conversion and digital delay. It has 32ch on a PCB.

4 - 27
Generating the base clock and timing signals for Tx/Rx, filtering for RF
EP4953 Timing Processor signal from DBF, quadrature detection (For Spectral/Color), transforming
of RF data to BLVDS.
SECTION 4

Processing of B/W and Spectral Doppler echo then transform it to BLVDS,

EP5233 Beam Processor 1 processing of Echo Tracking and physio. signal then transform it to
BLVDS.
Processing of Color Flow signal %Velocity, Variance, Power, Property&
EP5234 Beam Processor 2
and transform it to BLVDS.
Cine Memory function (Storing Line data temporally), scan conversion of
EP495601 Image Processor 1 US data, scan conversion of graphic data (Physio. signal and Echo
Tracking).
Post processing of image data from IP1, outputting video signal to monitor
EP4959 Video Processor
and interfacing I/O of peripheral equipment (Printer, VCR etc.).
EP4960 CPU Controlling entire system and generating graphics and characters signal.
EP4911 Backplane Motherboard.
Principle of System Operation
MN2-2008, Rev.2
 SSD-ALPHA10 PCB LIST (2/3) Ver.3 [Op]:Optional unit
SSD-ALPHA10 Unit/Module PCB Name Description
Ultrasound Main Unit EP5141 CPU I/O Relaying Ethernet/Parallel Port/Serial Port from host CPU.
SECTION 4

USM-28 Distributing video signal, supplying power to peripherals and proving

EP4915 Peripheral I/O
MN2-2008, Rev.2

interface for them.

EP4912 Power Supply I/O Controlling startup and shutting down system
EP4971 3.3V Power Supply unit Supplying +3.3V power.
Storage Drive Unit EU-9098* EP473203 Foot SW PCB Foot Switch connector.
EP5178 USB-ATA Converter Conversion of USB - ATA(IDE) protocol, relaying Foot Switch signal.
Viewing monitor IPC-1710* 17 inches color CRT monitor (SVGA)
Power Supply Unit Main Power unit EP5104 AC Line Filter Unit Line filter for AC input.
PSU-ALPHA10 EU-6030* EP5105 AC/DC Converter Unit High performance AC/DC converter (Improving power factor)
EP5106 DC/DC Converter Unit(1) DC +12V, DC +12V for cooling FAN
Principle of System Operation

EP5107 DC/DC Converter Unit(2) DC +24V, DC +5VSB

4 - 28
EP5108 Low Voltage Circuit(1) DC +5.1V, DC ± 5V
EP5109 Low Voltage Circuit(2) DC ±15V
EP5110 Motherboard Motherboard of power supply unit.
Sub Power unit EP5111 High Voltage Circuit(1) ± 70V
EU-6031* EP5127 High Voltage Circuit(2) ± 90V, HVB (0~+150V)
AC outlet Providing AC power for peripherals.
JB-274*(100V) EP5250 AC Outlet
JB-273*(200V)
Host Interface Unit JPEG encoding of video signal, processing of RT3D, EFV (Line data scan
EU-9102 EP4958 Image Processor 3 conversion).
[Op]Physio Signal Display unit Amplifier and A/D converter for physio. signal %ECG, PCG, Pulse,
PEU-ALPHA10* EP4997 Physio. AMP
Resp.&.
 SSD-ALPHA10 PCB LIST (3/3) Ver.3 [Op]:Optional unit
SSD-ALPHA10 Unit/Module PCB Name Description
[Op] IND probe connection Unit Cable with connectors, to connect Independent probe.
EU-9110
Software ver.3 and higher
[Op] Mechanical probe Tx/Rx circuits for IND probe, A/D conversion for STCW Doppler. Tx
connection Unit EU-9109 EP494900 Mecha Frontend circuit / Pre Amp / Transmission trigger / VBPF / Log Amp for
Software ver.4 and higher Mechanical probe.
EP5194 Mecha Connector Probe connector for mechanical probe
[Op] KI-SMA Unit Calculation of KI, A-SMA, CQ and WT, based on Black and White
EU-9100 EP4957 Image Processor 2 B-mode data.
Software ver.4 and higher
[Op] DV-800 connection kit Distributing digital video signal, and proving interface for DVD recorder
PM-A10-H001* EP5208 Peripheral I/O 2 DV-800* or LCD monitor.
Software ver.4 and higher
[Op] USB extension box Cable with connectors, to connect USB flash memory.
JB-284
Software ver.5 and higher
[Op] Viewing monitor 19 inches color LCD monitor (SVGA)
IPF-1901

4 - 29
SECTION 4
Principle of System Operation
MN2-2008, Rev.2
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

(Blank page)

4 - 30
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

Digital
1 Printer(Option) FDD CD-RW MODrive
Foot SW (Option)
USB/ATA
Converter Foot SW
PCB
EU-9098
Sector or
Linear or
Convex
Probe USI-153

PSC-138 IEEE1284 RS232C LAN

Jumper
TD

Jumper
DBF
WAVE GEN.1-3 F.E. Cont
Tx wave
D/A Gen CPU I/O
PROBE SEL
STC Seq.

LPF
16 Main Panel Assembly
Local Mecha
16
Gene Servo L-KEY-84*

A/D
HostCPU

Memory
Focus

Adder
Delay
MECHA F.E.
17inch

DBF1-3
Tx Pulse HDD COL
Gen Peripheral I/O Monitor
PRINTER
CONTROL

Adder
VBPF LOG B/W VIDEO IPC-1710(NTSC/PAL)
OUT

1 Clock
PRINTER
Divider CONTROL
B/W Printer(Option)
A/D COL VIDEO
OUT

VTR
CONTROL
Independent
AUDIO
Probe 1 Beam Processor 1 IN R
1
EU-9110 EU-9104 1
(OPTION) Timing ET& EU-9103
%+'*)!&-,()..,-!" Video Processor AUDIO COL Printer(Option)
Processor Phisyo DSP Plane OUT R
CTRL Cine Over Video RGB
RF Mode DSC Memory DAC.
Select Lay AUDIO
IN L
Processor Mecha Echo Plane VCR
Mode DSC Video
Probe A/D Process Enc. AUDIO
OUT L
ID Timing VCR (Option)
Control Line Mode Video
Echo DSC Y/C
Process Physio Dec. VIDEO IN

Probe Y/C
Monitor DOP D/A & Mixer & VIDEO OUT
WI Audio AMP
Process Selector
COMP
VIDEO OUT
Prn.&VCR
Process 1 %+'*)!&-,()..,-!$
EU-9102(OPTION) Control
Control Plane iLink
Cine Mode DSC

Beam Processor 2 Line Mode

DSC ECG/RESP IN
Flow PCG IN
Process JPEG PULSE IN
Enc. Physio ECG DC IN
RF AMP PCG DC IN
Process iLink PEU-ALPHA10
Control Power
Back Plane Conv. I/O PSU-ALPHA10 (OPTION)

SSD-ALPHA10 Ver.3
TITLE MODEL 1
SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM SSD-ALPHA10 1

4 - 31
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

(Blank Page)

4 - 32
 SSD-ALPHA10 PCB LIST (1/3) Ver.4~Ver.5 (~M00950)
SSD-ALPHA10 Unit/Module PCB Name Description
Main body PSC-138 EP4983 Audio Amp Amplifier for the sound. Control of loudness.
Main Panel L-KEY-84* Operation panel. It communicates with host CPU by USB 1.1 protocol.
Selecting probes, reading the probe ID, controlling HVS, codes of optional
Ultrasound Main Unit EP4948 Probe Selector
items and compound array probe.
USM-28 EP494901 Mech. Front End Tx/Rx circuits for IND probe, A/D conversion for STCW Doppler.
Transmission for electric probes %Including STCW transmitter&, primary
EP4950 Wave Generator
Pre AMP, receiver for STCW, 16ch%Including quadrature detector&
EP4996 Tx Generator Generating the waveform for transmission. 8ch.
Time Gain Control AMP (Adjusting the amplitude level of the signal at the
EP4951 Front End Control input of the Beam Former), generating Pre STC, controlling the motor of
Vol mode scanner and Mechanical probe.
Jumper board between Probe Selector and Wave Generator / Front End
EP5262 Jumper
Control and Rx Beam Former.
A/D conversion and digital delay. It has 32ch on a PCB.

4 - 33
EP4952 Rx Beam Former
Generating the base clock and timing signals for Tx/Rx, filtering for RF
EP4953 Timing Processor signal from DBF, quadrature detection (For Spectral/Color), transforming
of RF data to BLVDS.
SECTION 4

Processing of B/W and Spectral Doppler echo then transform it to BLVDS,

EP5233/
Beam Processor 1 processing of Echo Tracking and physio. signal then transform it to
EP532600 BLVDS.
Processing of Color Flow signal %Velocity, Variance, Power, Property&
EP5234/EP5327 Beam Processor 2
and transform it to BLVDS.
Cine Memory function (Storing Line data temporally), scan conversion of
EP495601/
Image Processor 1 US data, scan conversion of graphic data (Physio. signal and Echo
EP535901 Tracking).
Post processing of image data from IP1, outputting video signal to monitor
EP4959/EP5360 Video Processor
and interfacing I/O of peripheral equipment (Printer, VCR etc.).
EP4960 CPU Controlling entire system and generating graphics and characters signal.
EP4911 Backplane Motherboard.
Principle of System Operation
MN2-2008, Rev.2
 SSD-ALPHA10 PCB LIST (2/3) Ver.4~Ver.5 (~M00950) [Op]:Optional unit
SSD-ALPHA10 Unit/Module PCB Name Description
Ultrasound Main Unit EP5141 CPU I/O Relaying Ethernet/Parallel Port/Serial Port from host CPU.
SECTION 4

USM-28 Distributing video signal, supplying power to peripherals and proving

EP4915 Peripheral I/O
MN2-2008, Rev.2

interface for them.

EP4912 Power Supply I/O Controlling startup and shutting down system
EP4971 3.3V Power Supply unit Supplying +3.3V power.
Storage Drive Unit EU-9098* EP473203 Foot SW PCB Foot Switch connector.
EP5178 USB-ATA Converter Conversion of USB - ATA(IDE) protocol, relaying Foot Switch signal.
Viewing monitor IPC-1710* 17 inches color CRT monitor (SVGA)
Power Supply Unit Main Power unit EP5104 AC Line Filter Unit Line filter for AC input.
PSU-ALPHA10 EU-6030* EP5105 AC/DC Converter Unit High performance AC/DC converter (Improving power factor)
EP5106 DC/DC Converter Unit(1) DC +12V, DC +12V for cooling FAN
Principle of System Operation

EP5107 DC/DC Converter Unit(2) DC +24V, DC +5VSB

4 - 34
EP5108 Low Voltage Circuit(1) DC +5.1V, DC ± 5V
EP5109 Low Voltage Circuit(2) DC ±15V
EP5110 Motherboard Motherboard of power supply unit.
Sub Power unit EP5111 High Voltage Circuit(1) ± 70V
EU-6031* EP5127 High Voltage Circuit(2) ± 90V, HVB (0~+150V)
AC outlet Providing AC power for peripherals.
JB-274*(100V) EP5250 AC Outlet
JB-273*(200V)
[Op: Lite version] JPEG encoding of video signal, processing of RT3D, EFV (Line data scan
Host Interface Unit EU-9102 EP4958 Image Processor 3 conversion).
[Op] Physio Signal Display Amplifier and A/D converter for physio. signal % ECG, PCG, Pulse,
unit EP4997 Physio. AMP Resp.&.
PEU-ALPHA10*
 SSD-ALPHA10 PCB LIST (3/3) Ver.4~Ver.5 (~M00950) [Op]:Optional unit
SSD-ALPHA10 Unit/Module PCB Name Description
[Op] IND probe connection Unit Cable with connectors, to connect Independent probe.
EU-9110
Software ver.3 and higher
[Op] Mechanical probe Tx/Rx circuits for IND probe, A/D conversion for STCW Doppler. Tx
connection Unit EU-9109 EP494900 Mecha Frontend circuit / Pre Amp / Transmission trigger / VBPF / Log Amp for
Software ver.4 and higher Mechanical probe.
EP5194 Mecha Connector Probe connector for mechanical probe
[Op] KI-SMA Unit Calculation of KI, A-SMA, CQ and WT, based on Black and White
EU-9100 EP4957 Image Processor 2 B-mode data.
Software ver.4 and higher
[Op] DV-800 connection kit Distributing digital video signal, and proving interface for DVD recorder
PM-A10-H001* EP5208 Peripheral I/O 2 DV-800* or LCD monitor.
Software ver.4 and higher
[Op] USB extension box Cable with connectors, to connect USB flash memory.
JB-284
Software ver.5 and higher
[Op] Viewing monitor 19 inches color LCD monitor (SVGA)
IPF-1901

4 - 35
SECTION 4
Principle of System Operation
MN2-2008, Rev.2
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

(Blank page)

4 - 36
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

Digital
1 Printer(Option) FDD CD-RW MODrive
Fo o t SW (O p t io n )
USB/ATA
Converter Foot SW
PCB
EU-9098
Sector or
Linear or
Convex
Probe USI-153

PSC-138 IE EE1284 RS232C LA N

Jumper
TD

Jumper
DBF
WAVE GEN.1-3 F.E. Cont
Tx wave
D/A Gen CPUI/O
PROBE SEL
STC Seq.

LPF
16 M ain P an el A ssem bly
Local Mecha
16
Gene Servo L-KEY-84*

A/D
HostCPU

Memory
Focus

Adder
Delay
MECHA F.E.
1 7 in ch

DBF1-3
Tx Pulse HDD CO L
Gen Peripheral I/O M o n it o r
%+'*)!&-,()..,-!# P RI N TER
CO N TRO L
2 EU-9100(OPTION)

Adder
VBPF LOG B/W V I D EO IP C-1 7 1 0 (NT SC/P AL )
OUT
Mechanical Cine KI Proc.
Sector Clock
2 Divider
P RIN T ER
Probe CO N TRO L
Ctrl B/W P rin t er(O p t io n )
CO L V ID EO
A/D O UT

EU-9109 V TR
CO N TRO L
(OPTION)
Independent
A U DI O
Probe 1 Beam Processor 1 IN R
1
EU-9110 EU-9104 1
(OPTION) Timing %+'*)!&-,()..,-!"
EU-9103 Video Processor CO L P rin t er(O p t io n )
ET& A U DI O
Processor Phisyo DSP Plane OU T R
CTRL Cine Over Video RGB
RF Mode DSC Memory DAC.
Select Lay AU D IO
IN L
Processor Mecha Echo Plane V CR
Mode DSC Video
Probe A/D Process Enc. AUDIO
OUT L
ID Timing VCR (Op t io n )
Control Line Mode Video
Echo DSC Y /C
Process Physio Dec. V I D EO IN

Probe Y/C
Monitor D/A & Mixer & VI D EO O U T
DOP WI Audio AMP
Process Selector
CO MP 1 D VR (O p t io n )
VI D EO O U T
Prn.&VCR
Process 1 %+'*)!&-,()..,-!$
EU-9102(OPTION) Control DVI
Control Plane
Cine Mode DSC 2 Peripheral I/O2 iLink

Beam Processor 2 Line Mode ECG/RE SP IN

DSC P CG IN
Flow
Process JPEG P U L SE IN
Enc. Physio ECG D C IN
RF AMP P CG D C IN
Process iLink PEU-ALPHA10
Control Power
Back Plane Conv. I/O PSU-ALPHA10 (OPTION)

SSD-ALPHA10 Ver.4~Ver.5 (~M00950)

TITLE MODEL 1
SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM SSD-ALPHA10 1

4 - 37
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

(Blank Page)

4 - 38
 SSD-ALPHA10 PCB LIST (1/3) Ver.5 (M00951~M01050)
SSD-ALPHA10 Unit/Module PCB Name Description
Main body PSC-138 EP4983 Audio Amp Amplifier for the sound. Control of loudness.
Main Panel L-KEY-84* Operation panel. It communicates with host CPU by USB 1.1 protocol.
Selecting probes, reading the probe ID, controlling HVS, codes of optional
Ultrasound Main Unit EP4948 Probe Selector
items and compound array probe.
USM-28 EP494901 Mech. Front End Tx/Rx circuits for IND probe, A/D conversion for STCW Doppler.
Transmission for electric probes %Including STCW transmitter&, primary
EP4950 Wave Generator
Pre AMP, receiver for STCW, 16ch%Including quadrature detector&
EP4996 Tx Generator Generating the waveform for transmission. 8ch.
Time Gain Control AMP (Adjusting the amplitude level of the signal at the
EP4951 Front End Control input of the Beam Former), generating Pre STC, controlling the motor of
Vol mode scanner and Mechanical probe.
Jumper board between Probe Selector and Wave Generator / Front End
EP5262 Jumper
Control and Rx Beam Former.
A/D conversion and digital delay. It has 32ch on a PCB.

4 - 39
EP4952 Rx Beam Former
Generating the base clock and timing signals for Tx/Rx, filtering for RF
EP4953 Timing Processor signal from DBF, quadrature detection (For Spectral/Color), transforming
of RF data to BLVDS.
SECTION 4

Processing of B/W and Spectral Doppler echo then transform it to BLVDS,

EP532600 Beam Processor 1 processing of Echo Tracking and physio. signal then transform it to
BLVDS.
Processing of Color Flow signal %Velocity, Variance, Power, Property&
EP5327 Beam Processor 2
and transform it to BLVDS.
Cine Memory function (Storing Line data temporally), scan conversion of
EP535901 Image Processor 1 US data, scan conversion of graphic data (Physio. signal and Echo
Tracking).
Post processing of image data from IP1, outputting video signal to monitor
EP5360 Video Processor
and interfacing I/O of peripheral equipment (Printer, VCR etc.).
EP4960 CPU Controlling entire system and generating graphics and characters signal.
EP5280 Backplane Motherboard.
Principle of System Operation
MN2-2008, Rev.2
 SSD-ALPHA10 PCB LIST (2/3) Ver.5 (M00951~M01050) [Op]:Optional unit
SSD-ALPHA10 Unit/Module PCB Name Description
Ultrasound Main Unit EP5141 CPU I/O Relaying Ethernet/Parallel Port/Serial Port from host CPU.
SECTION 4

USM-28 Distributing video signal, supplying power to peripherals and proving

EP5335 Peripheral I/O
MN2-2008, Rev.2

interface for them.

EP5281 Power Supply I/O Controlling startup and shutting down system. Supplying +3.3V power.
Storage Drive Unit EU-9098* EP473203 Foot SW PCB Foot Switch connector.
EP5178 USB-ATA Converter Conversion of USB - ATA(IDE) protocol, relaying Foot Switch signal.
Viewing monitor IPC-1710* 17 inches color CRT monitor (SVGA)
Power Supply Unit Main Power unit EP5104 AC Line Filter Unit Line filter for AC input.
PSU-ALPHA10 EU-6030* EP5105 AC/DC Converter Unit High performance AC/DC converter (Improving power factor)
EP5372 DC/DC Converter Unit DC +12V, DC +12V for cooling FAN, DC +5VSB
EP5373 Low Voltage Circuit DC +24V, DC +5.1V, DC ± 5V, DC ±15V
Principle of System Operation

Sub Power unit EP5111 High Voltage Circuit(1) ± 70V

4 - 40
EU-6031* EP5127 High Voltage Circuit(2) ± 90V, HVB (0~+150V)
AC outlet Providing AC power for peripherals.
JB-274*(100V) EP5250 AC Outlet
JB-273*(200V)
[Op: Lite version] JPEG encoding of video signal, processing of RT3D, EFV (Line data scan
Host Interface Unit EU-9102 EP4958 Image Processor 3 conversion).
[Op] Physio Signal Display Amplifier and A/D converter for physio. signal % ECG, PCG, Pulse,
unit EP4997 Physio. AMP Resp.&.
PEU-ALPHA10*
[Op] IND probe connection Cable with connectors, to connect Independent probe.
Unit EU-9110
Software ver.3 and higher
[Op] Mechanical probe Tx/Rx circuits for IND probe, A/D conversion for STCW Doppler. Tx
connection Unit EU-9109 EP494900 Mecha Frontend circuit / Pre Amp / Transmission trigger / VBPF / Log Amp for Mechanical
Software ver.4 and higher probe.
EP5194 Mecha Connector Probe connector for mechanical probe
 SSD-ALPHA10 PCB LIST (3/3) Ver.5 (M00951~M01050) [Op]:Optional unit
SSD-ALPHA10 Unit/Module PCB Name Description
[Op] KI-SMA Unit Calculation of KI, A-SMA, CQ and WT, based on Black and White
EU-9100 EP4957 Image Processor 2 B-mode data.
Software ver.4 and higher
[Op] DV I/O kit Distributing digital video signal, and proving interface (DVI) for DVD
For M00951 and after PM-A10-H006 EP5346 Peripheral I/O 2 recorder DV-800* and LCD monitor. Distributing digital video signal, and
proving interface (IEEE1394) for Sony/JVC DVD recorders.
[Op] USB extension box Cable with connectors, to connect USB flash memory.
JB-284
Software ver.5 and higher
[Op] Viewing monitor 19 inches color LCD monitor (SVGA)
IPF-1901

4 - 41
SECTION 4
Principle of System Operation
MN2-2008, Rev.2
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

(Blank page)

4 - 42
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

1 Digital FDD CD-RW MODrive

Printer(Option)
Fo o t SW (O p t io n )
USB/ATA
Converter Foot SW
PCB
3 EU-9098*
Sector or 3
Linear or JB-284(Option)
Convex
Probe USI-153

PSC-138 I EEE1284 RS232C LA N

M ain P an el Assem bly

Jumper
TD

Jumper
DBF
L-KEY-84*
WAVE GEN.1-3 F.E. Cont
Tx wave
D/A Gen CPUI/O
PROBE SEL
STC Seq.

LPF
16
Local Mecha IP C-1 7 1 0 (N T SC/P A L )
16
Gene Servo
HostCPU

A/D
1 7 in ch
CO L
M o n it o r

Memory
Focus

Adder
Delay
MECHA F.E.

DBF1-3
Tx Pulse HDD P RI N TER
Gen Peripheral I/O CO N TRO L B/W P rin t er(O p t io n )

%+'*)!&-,()..,-!# B/W V I D EO
OUT
2 EU-9100(OPTION)

Adder
VBPF LOG P RIN TE R
CO N TRO L
Mechanical Cine KI Proc.
Sector Clock CO L V I D EO
2 Divider OUT
Probe CO L P rin t er(O p t io n )
Ctrl V TR
A/D CO N T RO L
3 Video Processor AUDIO
EU-9109 IN R
(OPTION) Over Video RGB
Independent AUDIO
Probe Lay Memory DAC. OUT R VCR (Op t io n )
1 Beam Processor 1 1 1
EU-9110 TMDS AUDIO
Timing EU-9104
%+'*)!&-,()..,-!"
EU-9103 Video IN L
(OPTION) ET& V CR
Processor Phisyo DSP Plane Enc. A U D IO
CTRL Cine OUT L
RF Mode DSC
Select Processor IEEE Y /C
Mecha Echo Plane 1394 V I D EO IN 1 DVR (Op t io n )
Probe A/D Process Mode DSC
Y /C
ID Timing Video V I D EO O U T
Control Line Mode Dec.
Echo DSC CO MP
Process Physio V ID EO
O UT
Probe
Monitor D/A & Mixer & D VI
DOP WI Audio AMP Selector
Process D VI 3
Prn.&VCR
1 %+'*)!&-,()..,-!$
2 EU-9102(OPTION) Control
Process
Plane iLink
Control Cine Mode DSC 2 3 Peripheral I/O2 B
Beam Processor 2 Line Mode E CG/RE SP IN
DSC P CG IN
Flow
Process JPEG P UL SE IN
Enc. Physio E CG D C IN
RF AMP P CG D C IN
Process iLink PEU-ALPHA10
Control Power
Back Plane Conv. I/O PSU-ALPHA10 (OPTION)

SSD-ALPHA10 Ver.5 (M00951~M01050)

TITLE MODEL 1
SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM SSD-ALPHA10 1

4 - 43
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

(Blank Page)

4 - 44
 SSD-ALPHA10 PCB LIST (1/3) Ver.5 (M01051~M01240)
SSD-ALPHA10 Unit/Module PCB Name Description
Main body PSC-138 EP4983 Audio Amp Amplifier for the sound. Control of loudness.
Main Panel L-KEY-84* Operation panel. It communicates with host CPU by USB 1.1 protocol.
Selecting probes, reading the probe ID, controlling HVS, codes of optional
Ultrasound Main Unit EP4948 Probe Selector
items and compound array probe.
USM-28 EP494901 Mech. Front End Tx/Rx circuits for IND probe, A/D conversion for STCW Doppler.
Transmission for electric probes %Including STCW transmitter&, primary
EP4950 Wave Generator
Pre AMP, receiver for STCW, 16ch%Including quadrature detector&
EP4996 Tx Generator Generating the waveform for transmission. 8ch.
Time Gain Control AMP (Adjusting the amplitude level of the signal at the
EP4951 Front End Control input of the Beam Former), generating Pre STC, controlling the motor of
Vol mode scanner and Mechanical probe.
Jumper board between Probe Selector and Wave Generator / Front End
EP5325 Jumper
Control and Rx Beam Former.
A/D conversion and digital delay. It has 96ch on a PCB.

4 - 45
EP5318 Rx Beam Former
Generating the base clock and timing signals for Tx/Rx, filtering for RF
EP4953 Timing Processor signal from DBF, quadrature detection (For Spectral/Color), transforming
of RF data to BLVDS.
SECTION 4

Processing of B/W and Spectral Doppler echo then transform it to BLVDS,

EP532600 Beam Processor 1 processing of Echo Tracking and physio. signal then transform it to
BLVDS.
Processing of Color Flow signal %Velocity, Variance, Power, Property&
EP5327 Beam Processor 2
and transform it to BLVDS.
Cine Memory function (Storing Line data temporally), scan conversion of
EP535901 Image Processor 1 US data, scan conversion of graphic data (Physio. signal and Echo
Tracking).
Post processing of image data from IP1, outputting video signal to monitor
EP5360 Video Processor
and interfacing I/O of peripheral equipment (Printer, VCR etc.).
EP4960 CPU Controlling entire system and generating graphics and characters signal.
EP5280 Backplane Motherboard.
Principle of System Operation
MN2-2008, Rev.2
 SSD-ALPHA10 PCB LIST (2/3) Ver.5 (M01051~M01240) [Op]:Optional unit
SSD-ALPHA10 Unit/Module PCB Name Description
Ultrasound Main Unit EP5141 CPU I/O Relaying Ethernet/Parallel Port/Serial Port from host CPU.
SECTION 4

USM-28 Distributing video signal, supplying power to peripherals and proving

EP5335 Peripheral I/O
MN2-2008, Rev.2

interface for them.

EP5281 Power Supply I/O Controlling startup and shutting down system. Supplying +3.3V power.
Storage Drive Unit EU-9098* EP473203 Foot SW PCB Foot Switch connector.
EP5178 USB-ATA Converter Conversion of USB - ATA(IDE) protocol, relaying Foot Switch signal.
Viewing monitor IPC-1710* 17 inches color CRT monitor (SVGA)
Power Supply Unit Main Power unit EP5104 AC Line Filter Unit Line filter for AC input.
PSU-ALPHA10 EU-6030* EP5105 AC/DC Converter Unit High performance AC/DC converter (Improving power factor)
EP5372 DC/DC Converter Unit DC +12V, DC +12V for cooling FAN, DC +5VSB
EP5373 Low Voltage Circuit DC +24V, DC +5.1V, DC ± 5V, DC ±15V
Principle of System Operation

Sub Power unit EP5111 High Voltage Circuit(1) ± 70V

4 - 46
EU-6031* EP5127 High Voltage Circuit(2) ± 90V, HVB (0~+150V)
AC outlet Providing AC power for peripherals.
JB-274*(100V) EP5250 AC Outlet
JB-273*(200V)
[Op: Lite version] JPEG encoding of video signal, processing of RT3D, EFV (Line data scan
Host Interface Unit EU-9102 EP4958 Image Processor 3 conversion).
[Op] Physio Signal Display Amplifier and A/D converter for physio. signal % ECG, PCG, Pulse,
unit EP4997 Physio. AMP Resp.&.
PEU-ALPHA10*
[Op] IND probe connection Cable with connectors, to connect Independent probe.
Unit EU-9110
Software ver.3 and higher
[Op] Mechanical probe Tx/Rx circuits for IND probe, A/D conversion for STCW Doppler. Tx
connection Unit EU-9109 EP494900 Mecha Frontend circuit / Pre Amp / Transmission trigger / VBPF / Log Amp for Mechanical
Software ver.4 and higher probe.
EP5194 Mecha Connector Probe connector for mechanical probe
 SSD-ALPHA10 PCB LIST (3/3) Ver.5 (M01051~M01240) [Op]:Optional unit
SSD-ALPHA10 Unit/Module PCB Name Description
[Op] KI-SMA Unit Calculation of KI, A-SMA, CQ and WT, based on Black and White
EU-9100 EP4957 Image Processor 2 B-mode data.
Software ver.4 and higher
[Op] DV I/O kit Distributing digital video signal, and proving interface (DVI) for DVD
For M00951 and after PM-A10-H006 EP5346 Peripheral I/O 2 recorder DV-800* and LCD monitor. Distributing digital video signal, and
proving interface (IEEE1394) for Sony/JVC DVD recorders.
[Op] USB extension box Cable with connectors, to connect USB flash memory.
JB-284
Software ver.5 and higher
[Op] Viewing monitor 19 inches color LCD monitor (SVGA)
IPF-1901

4 - 47
SECTION 4
Principle of System Operation
MN2-2008, Rev.2
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

(Blank page)

4 - 48
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

1 Digital FDD CD-RW MODrive

Printer(Option)
Fo o t SW (O p t io n )
USB/ATA
Converter Foot SW
PCB
3 EU-9098*
Sector or 3
Linear or JB-284(Option)
Convex
Probe USI-153

PSC-138 IE EE1284 RS232C LA N

M ain P an el A ssem bly

Jumper
TD

Jumper
DBF
L-KEY-84*
WAVE GEN.1-3 F.E. Cont
Tx wave
D/A Gen CPUI/O
PROBE SEL
STC Seq.

LPF
16
Local Mecha IP C-1 7 1 0 (N T SC/P A L )
16
Gene Servo

8ch
A/D
HostCPU 1 7 in ch
3

12
COL

DBF 1-3
M o n it o r

Memory
Focus

16ch
Adder
Delay
MECHA F.E.
Tx Pulse HDD P RIN T ER
Gen Peripheral I/O CO N TRO L B/W P rin t er(O p t io n )

6
%+'*)!&-,()..,-!# B/W V I D EO
OUT
2 EU-9100(OPTION)

Adder
VBPF LOG P RI N TER
CO N TRO L
Mechanical Cine KI Proc.
Sector Clock CO L V I D EO
2 Divider OU T
Probe CO L P rin t er(O p t io n )
Ctrl VTR
A/D CO N TRO L
3 Video Processor A UDIO
EU-9109 IN R
(OPTION) Over Video RGB
Independent A UDIO
Probe Lay Memory DAC. O UT R VCR (O p t io n )
1 Beam Processor 1 1 1
EU-9110 TMDS A UDIO
Timing EU-9104 EU-9103
%+'*)!&-,()..,-!"! Video IN L
(OPTION) ET& V CR
Processor Phisyo DSP Plane Enc. AUDIO
CTRL Cine OUT L
RF Mode DSC
Select Processor IEEE Y /C
Mecha Echo Plane 1394 VIDEO IN 1 DVR (O p t io n )
Probe A/D Process Mode DSC
Y /C
ID Timing Video V ID E O O U T
Control Line Mode Dec.
Echo DSC CO MP
Process Physio V ID EO
O UT
Probe
Monitor D/A & Mixer & D VI
DOP WI Audio AMP Selector
Process D VI 3
Prn.&VCR
1 %+'*)!&-,()..,-!$
2 EU-9102(OPTION) Control
Process
Plane iL ink
Control Cine Mode DSC 2 3 Peripheral I/O2 B
Beam Processor 2 Line Mode E CG/RE SP IN
DSC P CG IN
Flow
Process JPEG P U L SE IN
Enc. Physio E CG D C IN
RF AMP P CG D C IN
Process iLink PEU-ALPHA10
Control Power
Back Plane Conv. I/O PSU-ALPHA10 (OPTION)

SSD-ALPHA10 Ver.5 (M01051~M01240)

TITLE MODEL 1
SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM SSD-ALPHA10 1

4 - 49
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

(Blank Page)

4 - 50
 SSD-ALPHA10 PCB LIST (1/3) Ver.6 (M01241~M01530)
SSD-ALPHA10 Unit/Module PCB Name Description
Main body PSC-138 EP4983 Audio Amp Amplifier for the sound. Control of loudness.
Main Panel L-KEY-84* Operation panel. It communicates with host CPU by USB 1.1 protocol.
Selecting probes, reading the probe ID, controlling HVS, codes of optional
Ultrasound Main Unit EP4948 Probe Selector
items and compound array probe.
USM-28 EP494901 Mech. Front End Tx/Rx circuits for IND probe, A/D conversion for STCW Doppler.
Transmission for electric probes %Including STCW transmitter&, primary
EP4950 Wave Generator
Pre AMP, receiver for STCW, 16ch%Including quadrature detector&
EP4996 Tx Generator Generating the waveform for transmission. 8ch.
Time Gain Control AMP (Adjusting the amplitude level of the signal at the
EP4951 Front End Control input of the Beam Former), generating Pre STC, controlling the motor of
Vol mode scanner and Mechanical probe.
Jumper board between Probe Selector and Wave Generator / Front End
EP5325 Jumper
Control and Rx Beam Former.
A/D conversion and digital delay. It has 96ch on a PCB.

4 - 51
EP5318 Rx Beam Former
Generating the base clock and timing signals for Tx/Rx, filtering for RF
EP4953 Timing Processor signal from DBF, quadrature detection (For Spectral/Color), transforming
of RF data to BLVDS.
SECTION 4

Processing of B/W (included AIP, Edge Optimizer) and Spectral Doppler

EP532601 Beam Processor 1 echo then transform it to BLVDS, processing of Echo Tracking and physio.
signal then transform it to BLVDS.
Processing of Color Flow signal %Velocity, Variance, Power, Property&
EP5327 Beam Processor 2
and transform it to BLVDS.
Cine Memory function (Storing Line data temporally), scan conversion of
EP535901 Image Processor 1 US data, scan conversion of graphic data (Physio. signal and Echo
Tracking).
Post processing of image data from IP1, outputting video signal to monitor
EP5360 Video Processor
and interfacing I/O of peripheral equipment (Printer, VCR etc.).
EP4960/EP5353 CPU Controlling entire system and generating graphics and characters signal.
EP5280 Backplane Motherboard.
Principle of System Operation
MN2-2008, Rev.2
 SSD-ALPHA10 PCB LIST (2/3) Ver.6 (M01241~M01530) [Op]:Optional unit
SSD-ALPHA10 Unit/Module PCB Name Description
Ultrasound Main Unit EP5141 CPU I/O Relaying Ethernet/Parallel Port/Serial Port from host CPU.
SECTION 4

USM-28 Distributing video signal, supplying power to peripherals and proving

EP5335 Peripheral I/O
MN2-2008, Rev.2

interface for them.

EP5281 Power Supply I/O Controlling startup and shutting down system. Supplying +3.3V power.
Storage Drive Unit EU-9098* EP473203 Foot SW PCB Foot Switch connector.
EP5178 USB-ATA Converter Conversion of USB - ATA(IDE) protocol, relaying Foot Switch signal.
Viewing monitor IPC-1710* 17 inches color CRT monitor (SVGA)
Power Supply Unit Main Power unit EP5104 AC Line Filter Unit Line filter for AC input.
PSU-ALPHA10 EU-6030* EP5105 AC/DC Converter Unit High performance AC/DC converter (Improving power factor)
EP5372 DC/DC Converter Unit DC +12V, DC +12V for cooling FAN, DC +5VSB
EP5373 Low Voltage Circuit DC +24V, DC +5.1V, DC ± 5V, DC ±15V
Principle of System Operation

Sub Power unit EP5111 High Voltage Circuit(1) ± 70V

4 - 52
EU-6031* EP5127 High Voltage Circuit(2) ± 90V, HVB (0~+150V)
AC outlet Providing AC power for peripherals.
JB-274*(100V) EP5250 AC Outlet
JB-273*(200V)
[Op: Lite version] JPEG encoding of video signal, processing of RT3D, EFV (Line data scan
Host Interface Unit EU-9102 EP4958 Image Processor 3 conversion).
[Op] Physio Signal Display Amplifier and A/D converter for physio. signal % ECG, PCG, Pulse,
unit EP4997 Physio. AMP Resp.&.
PEU-ALPHA10*
[Op] IND probe connection Cable with connectors, to connect Independent probe.
Unit EU-9110
Software ver.3 and higher
[Op] Mechanical probe Tx/Rx circuits for IND probe, A/D conversion for STCW Doppler. Tx
connection Unit EU-9109 EP494900 Mecha Frontend circuit / Pre Amp / Transmission trigger / VBPF / Log Amp for Mechanical
Software ver.4 and higher probe.
EP5194 Mecha Connector Probe connector for mechanical probe
 SSD-ALPHA10 PCB LIST (3/3) Ver.6 (M01241~M01530) [Op]:Optional unit
SSD-ALPHA10 Unit/Module PCB Name Description
[Op] KI-SMA Unit Calculation of KI, A-SMA, CQ and WT, based on Black and White
EU-9100 EP4957 Image Processor 2 B-mode data.
Software ver.4 and higher
[Op] DV I/O kit Distributing digital video signal, and proving interface (DVI) for DVD
For M00951 and after PM-A10-H006 EP5346 Peripheral I/O 2 recorder DV-800* and LCD monitor. Distributing digital video signal, and
proving interface (IEEE1394) for Sony/JVC DVD recorders.
[Op] USB extension box Cable with connectors, to connect USB flash memory.
JB-284
Software ver.5 and higher
[Op] Viewing monitor 19 inches color LCD monitor (SVGA)
IPF-1901

4 - 53
SECTION 4
Principle of System Operation
MN2-2008, Rev.2
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

(Blank page)

4 - 54
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

1 Digital FDD CD-RW MODrive

Printer(Option)
Fo o t SW (O p t io n )
USB/ATA
Converter Foot SW
PCB
3 EU-9098*
Sector or 3
Linear or JB-284(Option)
Convex
Probe USI-153

PSC-138 I EE E1284 RS232C LA N

M ain P an el A ssem bly

Jumper
TD

Jumper
DBF
L-KEY-84*
WAVE GEN.1-3 F.E. Cont
Tx wave
D/A Gen CPUI/O
PROBE SEL IP C-1 7 1 0 (N T SC/P A L )
STC Seq.

LPF
1 7 in ch
16
Local Mecha COL
Gene M o n it o r
16 Servo

8ch
A/D
HostCPU IP F-1 9 0 1 (O P T IO N )
4 4

12

DBF 1-3
1 9 in ch
FP D

Memory
Focus
M o n it o r

16ch
Adder
Delay
MECHA F.E.
Tx Pulse HDD P RI N TER
Gen Peripheral I/O CO N TRO L B/W P rin t er(O p t io n )

6
%+'*)!&-,()..,-!# B/W V I D E O
OUT
2 EU-9100(OPTION)

Adder
VBPF LOG P RIN T ER
CO N TRO L
Mechanical Cine KI Proc.
Sector Clock CO L V I D E O
2 Divider OUT
Probe CO L P rin t er(O p t io n )
Ctrl V TR
A/D CO N T RO L
3 Video Processor AUDIO
EU-9109 IN R
(OPTION) Over Video RGB
Independent 4 AUDIO
Probe Lay Memory DAC. OUT R VCR (O p t io n )
1 Beam Processor 1 1 1
EU-9110 TMDS AUDIO
Timing EU-9104 EU-9103
%+'*)!&-,()..,-!"! Video IN L
(OPTION) ET& V CR
Processor Phisyo DSP Plane Enc. A U D IO
CTRL Cine OUT L
RF Mode DSC
Select Processor IEEE Y /C
Mecha Echo Plane 1394 V I D EO IN 1 D VR (O p t io n )
Probe A/D Process Mode DSC
Y /C
ID Timing Video V I D EO O U T
Control LineCorr. Line Mode Dec.
Echo DSC CO MP
AIP Process Physio V I D EO
OU T
Probe
Monitor D/A & Mixer & DVI
DOP WI Audio AMP Selector
Process DV I 3
Prn.&VCR
Process 1 2 %+'*)!&-,()..,-!$
EU-9102(OPTION) Control
Plane iLink
Control Cine Mode DSC 2 3 Peripheral I/O2 B
Beam Processor 2 Line Mode E CG/RE SP IN
DSC P CG IN
Flow
Process JPEG P U L SE IN
Enc. Physio E CG D C IN
RF AMP P CG D C IN
Process iLink PEU-ALPHA10
Control Power
Back Plane Conv. I/O PSU-ALPHA10 (OPTION)

SSD-ALPHA10 Ver.6 (M01241~M01530)

TITLE MODEL 1
SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM SSD-ALPHA10 1

4 - 55
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

(Blank Page)

4 - 56
 SSD-ALPHA10 PCB LIST (1/3) Ver.6 (M01531~M01590)
SSD-ALPHA10 Unit/Module PCB Name Description
Main body PSC-138 EP4983 Audio Amp Amplifier for the sound. Control of loudness.
Main Panel L-KEY-84* Operation panel. It communicates with host CPU by USB 1.1 protocol.
Selecting probes, reading the probe ID, controlling HVS, codes of optional
Ultrasound Main Unit EP4948 Probe Selector
items and compound array probe.
USM-28 EP494901 Mech. Front End Tx/Rx circuits for IND probe, A/D conversion for STCW Doppler.
Transmission for electric probes %Including STCW transmitter&, primary
EP4950 Wave Generator
Pre AMP, receiver for STCW, 16ch%Including quadrature detector&
EP4996 Tx Generator Generating the waveform for transmission. 8ch.
Time Gain Control AMP (Adjusting the amplitude level of the signal at the
EP4951 Front End Control input of the Beam Former), generating Pre STC, controlling the motor of
Vol mode scanner and Mechanical probe.
Jumper board between Probe Selector and Wave Generator / Front End
EP5325 Jumper
Control and Rx Beam Former.
A/D conversion and digital delay. It has 96ch on a PCB.

4 - 57
EP5318 Rx Beam Former
Generating the base clock and timing signals for Tx/Rx, filtering for RF
EP4953 Timing Processor signal from DBF, quadrature detection (For Spectral/Color), transforming
of RF data to BLVDS.
SECTION 4

Processing of B/W (included AIP, Edge Optimizer) and Spectral Doppler

EP532601 Beam Processor 1 echo then transform it to BLVDS, processing of Echo Tracking and physio.
signal then transform it to BLVDS.
Processing of Color Flow signal %Velocity, Variance, Power, Property&
EP5327 Beam Processor 2
and transform it to BLVDS.
Cine Memory function (Storing Line data temporally), scan conversion of
EP535901 Image Processor 1 US data, scan conversion of graphic data (Physio. signal and Echo
Tracking).
Post processing of image data from IP1, outputting video signal to monitor
EP5360 Video Processor
and interfacing I/O of peripheral equipment (Printer, VCR etc.).
EP5353 CPU Controlling entire system and generating graphics and characters signal.
EP5280 Backplane Motherboard.
Principle of System Operation
MN2-2008, Rev.2
 SSD-ALPHA10 PCB LIST (2/3) Ver.6 (M01531~M01590) [Op]:Optional unit
SSD-ALPHA10 Unit/Module PCB Name Description
Ultrasound Main Unit EP5141 CPU I/O Relaying Ethernet/Parallel Port/Serial Port from host CPU.
SECTION 4

USM-28 Distributing video signal, supplying power to peripherals and proving

EP5335 Peripheral I/O
MN2-2008, Rev.2

interface for them.

EP5281 Power Supply I/O Controlling startup and shutting down system. Supplying +3.3V power.
Storage Drive Unit EU-9098* EP473203 Foot SW PCB Foot Switch connector.
Conversion of USB - ATA(IDE) protocol, USB Hub function, relaying Foot
EP5503 USB-ATA Converter HUB
Switch signal.
Viewing monitor IPC-1710* 17 inches color CRT monitor (SVGA)
Power Supply Unit Main Power unit EP5104 AC Line Filter Unit Line filter for AC input.
PSU-ALPHA10 EU-6030* EP5105 AC/DC Converter Unit High performance AC/DC converter (Improving power factor)
EP5372 DC/DC Converter Unit DC +12V, DC +12V for cooling FAN, DC +5VSB
Principle of System Operation

EP5373 Low Voltage Circuit DC +24V, DC +5.1V, DC ± 5V, DC ±15V

4 - 58
Sub Power unit EP5111 High Voltage Circuit(1) ± 70V
EU-6031* EP5127 High Voltage Circuit(2) ± 90V, HVB (0~+150V)
AC outlet Providing AC power for peripherals.
JB-274*(100V) EP5250 AC Outlet
JB-273*(200V)
[Op: Lite version] JPEG encoding of video signal, processing of RT3D, EFV (Line data scan
Host Interface Unit EU-9102 EP4958 Image Processor 3 conversion).
[Op] Physio Signal Display Amplifier and A/D converter for physio. signal % ECG, PCG, Pulse,
unit EP4997 Physio. AMP Resp.&.
PEU-ALPHA10*
[Op] IND probe connection Cable with connectors, to connect Independent probe.
Unit EU-9110
Software ver.3 and higher
[Op] Mechanical probe Tx/Rx circuits for IND probe, A/D conversion for STCW Doppler. Tx
connection Unit EU-9109 EP494900 Mecha Frontend circuit / Pre Amp / Transmission trigger / VBPF / Log Amp for Mechanical
Software ver.4 and higher probe.
EP5194 Mecha Connector Probe connector for mechanical probe
 SSD-ALPHA10 PCB LIST (3/3) Ver.6 (M01531~M01590) [Op]:Optional unit
SSD-ALPHA10 Unit/Module PCB Name Description
[Op] KI-SMA Unit Calculation of KI, A-SMA, CQ and WT, based on Black and White
EU-9100 EP4957 Image Processor 2 B-mode data.
Software ver.4 and higher
[Op] DV I/O kit Distributing digital video signal, and proving interface (DVI) for DVD
For M00951 and after PM-A10-H006 EP5346 Peripheral I/O 2 recorder DV-800* and LCD monitor. Distributing digital video signal, and
proving interface (IEEE1394) for Sony/JVC DVD recorders.
[Op] Viewing monitor 19 inches color LCD monitor (SVGA)
IPF-1901

4 - 59
SECTION 4
Principle of System Operation
MN2-2008, Rev.2
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

(Blank page)

4 - 60
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

1 Digital FDD DVD-RAM

Printer(Option)
Fo o t SW (O p t io n )
ATA-USB
Converter
-HUB Foot SW
PCB
3 5 EU-9098*
Sector or 3
Linear or JB-284(Option)
Convex
Probe USI-153

PSC-138 I EE E1284 RS232C LA N

M ain P an el A ssem bly

Jumper
TD

Jumper
DBF
L-KEY-84*
WAVE GEN.1-3 F.E. Cont
Tx wave
D/A Gen CPUI/O
PROBE SEL IP C-1 7 1 0 (N T SC/P A L )
STC Seq.

LPF
1 7 in ch
16
Local Mecha COL
Gene M o n it o r
16 Servo

8ch
A/D
HostCPU IP F-1 9 0 1 (O P T IO N )
4 4

12

DBF 1-3
1 9 in ch
FP D

Memory
Focus
M o n it o r

16ch
Adder
Delay
MECHA F.E.
Tx Pulse HDD P RI N TER
Gen Peripheral I/O CO N TRO L B/W P rin t er(O p t io n )

6
%+'*)!&-,()..,-!# B/W V I D E O
OUT
2 EU-9100(OPTION)

Adder
VBPF LOG P RIN T ER
CO N TRO L
Mechanical Cine KI Proc.
Sector Clock CO L V I D E O
2 Divider OUT
Probe CO L P rin t er(O p t io n )
Ctrl V TR
A/D CO N T RO L
3 Video Processor AUDIO
EU-9109 IN R
(OPTION) Over Video RGB
Independent 4 AUDIO
Probe Lay Memory DAC. OUT R VCR (O p t io n )
1 Beam Processor 1 1 1
EU-9110 TMDS AUDIO
Timing EU-9104 EU-9103
%+'*)!&-,()..,-!"! Video IN L
(OPTION) ET& V CR
Processor Phisyo DSP Plane Enc. A U D IO
CTRL Cine OUT L
RF Mode DSC
Select Processor IEEE Y /C
Mecha Echo Plane 1394 V I D EO IN 1 D VR (O p t io n )
Probe A/D Process Mode DSC
Y /C
ID Timing Video V I D EO O U T
Control LineCorr. Line Mode Dec.
Echo DSC CO MP
AIP Process Physio V I D EO
OU T
Probe
Monitor D/A & Mixer & DVI
DOP WI Audio AMP Selector
Process DV I 3
Prn.&VCR
Process 1 2 %+'*)!&-,()..,-!$
EU-9102(OPTION) Control
Plane iLink
Control Cine Mode DSC 2 3 Peripheral I/O2 B
Beam Processor 2 Line Mode E CG/RE SP IN
DSC P CG IN
Flow
Process JPEG P U L SE IN
Enc. Physio E CG D C IN
RF AMP P CG D C IN
Process iLink PEU-ALPHA10
Control Power
Back Plane Conv. I/O PSU-ALPHA10 (OPTION)

SSD-ALPHA10 Ver.6 (M01531~M01590)

TITLE MODEL 1
SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM SSD-ALPHA10 1

4 - 61
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

(Blank Page)

4 - 62
 SSD-ALPHA10 PCB LIST (1/3) Ver.6 (M01591~M01705)
SSD-ALPHA10 Unit/Module PCB Name Description
Main body PSC-138 EP4983 Audio Amp Amplifier for the sound. Control of loudness.
Main Panel L-KEY-84* Operation panel. It communicates with host CPU by USB 1.1 protocol.
Selecting probes, reading the probe ID, controlling HVS, codes of optional
Ultrasound Main Unit EP4948 Probe Selector
items and compound array probe.
USM-28 EP494901 Mech. Front End Tx/Rx circuits for IND probe, A/D conversion for STCW Doppler.
Transmission for electric probes %Including STCW transmitter&, primary
EP4950 Wave Generator
Pre AMP, receiver for STCW including quadrature detector
EP4996 Tx Generator Generating the waveform for transmission. 8ch.
Time Gain Control AMP (Adjusting the amplitude level of the signal at the
EP4951 Front End Control input of the Beam Former), generating Pre STC, controlling the motor of
Vol mode scanner and Mechanical probe.
Jumper board between Probe Selector and Wave Generator / Front End
EP5325 Jumper
Control and Rx Beam Former.
A/D conversion and digital delay. It has 96ch on a PCB.

4 - 63
EP5318 Rx Beam Former
Generating the base clock and timing signals for Tx/Rx, filtering for RF
EP4953 Timing Processor signal from DBF, quadrature detection (For Spectral/Color), transforming
of RF data to BLVDS.
SECTION 4

Processing of B/W (included AIP, Edge Optimizer) and Spectral Doppler

EP532601 Beam Processor 1 echo then transform it to BLVDS, processing of Echo Tracking and physio.
signal then transform it to BLVDS.
Processing of Color Flow signal %Velocity, Variance, Power, Property&
EP5327 Beam Processor 2
and transform it to BLVDS.
Cine Memory function (Storing Line data temporally), scan conversion of
EP535901 Image Processor 1 US data, scan conversion of graphic data (Physio. signal and Echo
Tracking).
Post processing of image data from IP1, outputting video signal to monitor
EP5360 Video Processor
and interfacing I/O of peripheral equipment (Printer, VCR etc.).
EP5353 CPU Controlling entire system and generating graphics and characters signal.
EP5280 Backplane Motherboard.
Principle of System Operation
MN2-2008, Rev.2
 SSD-ALPHA10 PCB LIST (2/3) Ver.6 (M01591~ M01705) [Op]:Optional unit
SSD-ALPHA10 Unit/Module PCB Name Description
Ultrasound Main Unit EP5141 CPU I/O Relaying Ethernet/Parallel Port/Serial Port from host CPU.
SECTION 4

USM-28 Distributing video signal, supplying power to peripherals and proving

EP5335 Peripheral I/O
MN2-2008, Rev.2

interface for them.

Distributing digital video signal, and proving interface (DVI) for DVD
EP5346 Peripheral I/O 2 recorder DV-800* and LCD monitor. Distributing digital video signal, and
proving interface (IEEE1394) for Sony/JVC DVD recorders.
EP5281 Power Supply I/O Controlling startup and shutting down system. Supplying +3.3V power.
Storage Drive Unit EU-9098* EP473203 Foot SW PCB Foot Switch connector.
EP5503 USB-ATA Converter HUB Conversion of USB - ATA(IDE) protocol, USB Hub function, relaying Foot
Switch signal.
Viewing monitor IPF-1901 19 inches color LCD monitor (SVGA)
Power Supply Unit Main Power unit EP5104 AC Line Filter Unit Line filter for AC input.
Principle of System Operation

PSU-ALPHA10 EU-6030* EP5105 AC/DC Converter Unit High performance AC/DC converter (Improving power factor)

4 - 64
EP5372 DC/DC Converter Unit DC +12V, DC +12V for cooling FAN, DC +5VSB
EP5373 Low Voltage Circuit DC +24V, DC +5.1V, DC ± 5V, DC ±15V
Sub Power unit EP5111 High Voltage Circuit(1) ± 70V
EU-6031* EP5127 High Voltage Circuit(2) ± 90V, HVB (0~+150V)
AC outlet Providing AC power for peripherals.
JB-274*(100V) EP5250 AC Outlet
JB-273*(200V)
[Op: Lite version] JPEG encoding of video signal, processing of RT3D, EFV (Line data scan
Host Interface Unit EU-9102 EP4958 Image Processor 3 conversion).
[Op] Physio Signal Display Amplifier and A/D converter for physio. signal % ECG, PCG, Pulse,
unit EP4997 Physio. AMP Resp.&.
PEU-ALPHA10*
[Op] IND probe connection Cable with connectors, to connect Independent probe.
Unit EU-9110
Software ver.3 and higher
 SSD-ALPHA10 PCB LIST (3/3) Ver.6 (M01591~ M01705) [Op]:Optional unit
SSD-ALPHA10 Unit/Module PCB Name Description
[Op] Mechanical probe Tx/Rx circuits for IND probe, A/D conversion for STCW Doppler. Tx
connection Unit EU-9109 EP494900 Mecha Frontend circuit / Pre Amp / Transmission trigger / VBPF / Log Amp for
Software ver.4 and higher Mechanical probe.
EP5194 Mecha Connector Probe connector for mechanical probe
[Op] KI-SMA Unit Calculation of KI, A-SMA, CQ and WT, based on Black and White
EU-9100 EP4957 Image Processor 2 B-mode data.
Software ver.4 and higher

4 - 65
SECTION 4
Principle of System Operation
MN2-2008, Rev.2
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

(Blank page)

4 - 66
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

1 Digital FDD DVD-RAM

Printer(Option)
Fo o t SW (O p t io n )
ATA-USB
Converter
-HUB Foot SW
PCB
3 5 EU-9098*
Sector or 3
Linear or JB-284(Option)
Convex
Probe USI-153

PSC-138 I EE E1284 RS232C LA N

M ain P an el A ssem bly

Jumper
TD

Jumper
DBF
L-KEY-84*
WAVE GEN.1-3 F.E. Cont
Tx wave
D/A Gen CPUI/O
PROBE SEL IP C-1 7 1 0 (N T SC/P A L )
STC Seq.

LPF
1 7 in ch
16
Local Mecha COL
Gene M o n it o r
16 Servo

8ch
A/D
HostCPU IP F-1 9 0 1 (O P T IO N )
4 4

12

DBF 1-3
1 9 in ch
FP D

Memory
Focus
M o n it o r

16ch
Adder
Delay
MECHA F.E.
Tx Pulse HDD P RI N TER
Gen Peripheral I/O CO N TRO L B/W P rin t er(O p t io n )

6
%+'*)!&-,()..,-!# B/W V I D E O
OUT
2 EU-9100(OPTION)

Adder
VBPF LOG P RIN T ER
CO N TRO L
Mechanical Cine KI Proc.
Sector Clock CO L V I D E O
2 Divider OUT
Probe CO L P rin t er(O p t io n )
Ctrl V TR
A/D CO N T RO L
3 Video Processor AUDIO
EU-9109 IN R
(OPTION) Over Video RGB
Independent 4 AUDIO
Probe Lay Memory DAC. OUT R VCR (O p t io n )
1 Beam Processor 1 1 1
EU-9110 TMDS AUDIO
Timing EU-9104 EU-9103
%+'*)!&-,()..,-!"! Video IN L
(OPTION) ET& V CR
Processor Phisyo DSP Plane Enc. A U D IO
CTRL Cine OUT L
RF Mode DSC
Select Processor IEEE Y /C
Mecha Echo Plane 1394 V I D EO IN 1 D VR (O p t io n )
Probe A/D Process Mode DSC
Y /C
ID Timing Video V I D EO O U T
Control LineCorr. Line Mode Dec.
Echo DSC CO MP
AIP Process Physio V I D EO
OU T
Probe
Monitor D/A & Mixer & DVI
DOP WI Audio AMP Selector
Process DV I 3
Prn.&VCR
Process 1 2 %+'*)!&-,()..,-!$
EU-9102(OPTION) Control
Plane iLink
Control Cine Mode DSC 2 3 Peripheral I/O2 B
Beam Processor 2 Line Mode E CG/RE SP IN
DSC P CG IN
Flow
Process JPEG P U L SE IN
Enc. Physio E CG D C IN
RF AMP P CG D C IN
Process iLink PEU-ALPHA10
Control Power
Back Plane Conv. I/O PSU-ALPHA10 (OPTION)

SSD-ALPHA10 Ver.6 (M01591~ M01705)

TITLE MODEL 1
SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM SSD-ALPHA10 1

4 - 67
MN2-2008, Rev.2 (DRAFT)
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

(Blank Page)

4 - 68
 SSD-ALPHA10 PCB LIST (1/3) Ver.6~Ver.7 (M01706~)
SSD-ALPHA10 Unit/Module PCB Name Description
Main body PSC-138 EP4983 Audio Amp Amplifier for the sound. Control of loudness.
Main Panel L-KEY-84* Operation panel. It communicates with host CPU by USB 1.1 protocol.
Selecting probes, reading the probe ID, controlling HVS, codes of optional
Ultrasound Main Unit EP4948 Probe Selector
items and compound array probe.
Tx/Rx circuits for IND probe, A/D conversion for STCW/Analog PW
USM-28 EP544102 Mech. Front End
Doppler.
Transmission for electric probes % Including STCW/Analog PW
EP4950 Wave Generator transmitter&, primary Pre AMP, receiver for STCW/Analog PW including
quadrature detector
EP4996 Tx Generator Generating the waveform for transmission. 8ch.
Time Gain Control AMP (Adjusting the amplitude level of the signal at the
EP4951 Front End Control input of the Beam Former), generating Pre STC, controlling the motor of
Vol mode scanner and Mechanical probe.
Jumper board between Probe Selector and Wave Generator / Front End
EP5325 Jumper
Control and Rx Beam Former.

4 - 69
EP5318 Rx Beam Former A/D conversion and digital delay. It has 96ch on a PCB.
Generating the base clock and timing signals for Tx/Rx, filtering for RF
EP4953 Timing Processor signal from DBF, quadrature detection (For Spectral/Color), transforming
SECTION 4

of RF data to BLVDS.
Processing of B/W (included AIP, Edge Optimizer) and Spectral Doppler
EP532601 Beam Processor 1 echo then transform it to BLVDS, processing of Echo Tracking and physio.
signal then transform it to BLVDS.
Processing of Color Flow signal %Velocity, Variance, Power, Property&
EP5327 Beam Processor 2
and transform it to BLVDS.
Cine Memory function (Storing Line data temporally), scan conversion of
EP535901 Image Processor 1 US data, scan conversion of graphic data (Physio. signal and Echo
Tracking).
Post processing of image data from IP1, outputting video signal to monitor
EP5360 Video Processor
and interfacing I/O of peripheral equipment (Printer, VCR etc.).
EP5353 CPU Controlling entire system and generating graphics and characters signal.
EP5280 Backplane Motherboard.
Principle of System Operation
MN2-2008, Rev.2
 SSD-ALPHA10 PCB LIST (2/3) Ver.6~Ver.7 (M01706~) [Op]:Optional unit
SSD-ALPHA10 Unit/Module PCB Name Description
Ultrasound Main Unit EP5141 CPU I/O Relaying Ethernet/Parallel Port/Serial Port from host CPU.
SECTION 4

USM-28 Distributing video signal, supplying power to peripherals and proving

EP5335 Peripheral I/O
MN2-2008, Rev.2

interface for them.

Distributing digital video signal, and proving interface (DVI) for TEAC
EP5346 Peripheral I/O 2 DVD recorder and LCD monitor. Distributing digital video signal, and
proving interface (IEEE1394) for Sony/JVC DVD recorders.
EP5281 Power Supply I/O Controlling startup and shutting down system. Supplying +3.3V power.
Storage Drive Unit EU-9098* EP473203 Foot SW PCB Foot Switch connector.
EP5503 USB-ATA Converter HUB Conversion of USB - ATA(IDE) protocol, USB Hub function, relaying Foot
Switch signal.
Viewing Color TV monitor IPF-1901 19 inches color LCD monitor (SVGA)
Power Supply Unit Main Power unit EP5104 AC Line Filter Unit Line filter for AC input.
Principle of System Operation

PSU-ALPHA10 EU-6030* EP5105 AC/DC Converter Unit High performance AC/DC converter (Improving power factor)

4 - 70
EP5372 DC/DC Converter Unit DC +12V, DC +12V for cooling FAN, DC +5VSB
EP5373 Low Voltage Circuit DC +24V, DC +5.1V, DC ± 5V, DC ±15V
Sub Power unit EP5111 High Voltage Circuit(1) ± 70V
EU-6031* EP5127 High Voltage Circuit(2) ± 90V, HVB (0~+150V)
AC outlet Providing AC power for peripherals.
JB-274*(100V) EP5250 AC Outlet
JB-273*(200V)
[Op: Lite version] JPEG encoding of video signal, processing of RT3D, EFV (Line data scan
Host Interface Unit EU-9102 EP4958 Image Processor 3 conversion).
[Op] Physio Signal Display Amplifier and A/D converter for physio. signal % ECG, PCG, Pulse,
unit EP4997 Physio. AMP Resp.&.
PEU-ALPHA10*
[Op] IND probe connection Cable with connectors, to connect Independent probe.
Unit EU-9110
Software ver.3 and higher
 SSD-ALPHA10 PCB LIST (3/3) Ver.6~Ver.7 (M01706~) [Op]:Optional unit
SSD-ALPHA10 Unit/Module PCB Name Description
[Op] Mechanical probe Tx/Rx circuits for IND probe, A/D conversion for STCW/Analog PW
connection Unit EU-9124 EP544103 Mecha Frontend Doppler. Tx circuit / Pre Amp / Transmission trigger / VBPF / Log Amp
Software ver.4 and higher for Mechanical probe.
EP5194 Mecha Connector Probe connector for mechanical probe
[Op] KI-SMA Unit Calculation of KI, A-SMA, CQ and WT, based on Black and White
EU-9100 EP4957 Image Processor 2 B-mode data.
Software ver.4 and higher

4 - 71
SECTION 4
Principle of System Operation
MN2-2008, Rev.2
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

(Blank page)

4 - 72
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

1 Digital FDD DVD-RAM

Printer(Option)
Fo o t SW (Op t io n )
ATA-USB
Converter
-HUB Foot SW
PCB
3 5 EU-9098*
Sector or 3
Linear or 6
JB-284(Option)
Convex
Probe USI-153

PSC-138 I EEE 1284 RS232C LA N

M ain P an el Assem bly

Jumper
TD

Jumper
DBF
L-KEY-84*
WAVE GEN.1-3 F.E. Cont
Tx wave
D/A Gen CPUI/O
PROBE SEL IP C-1 7 1 0 (N T SC/P AL )
STC Seq.

LPF
1 7 in ch
16
Local CO L 6
Mecha M o n it o r
16
Gene Servo

8ch
A/D
HostCPU IP F-1 9 0 1 (O P T IO N )
4 4

12

DBF 1-3
1 9 in ch
FP D

Memory
Focus
M o n it o r

16ch
Adder
Delay
MECHA F.E.
Tx Pulse HDD P RI N TER
Gen Peripheral I/O CO N TRO L B/W P rin t er(O p t io n )

6
%+'*)!&-,()..,-!# B/W V I D EO
OUT
2 EU-9100(OPTION)

Adder
VBPF LOG P RI N T ER
CO N TRO L
Mechanical Cine KI Proc.
Sector Clock CO L V I D EO
2 Divider OUT
Probe CO L P rin t er(O p t io n )
Ctrl V TR
A/D CO N T RO L
3 Video Processor AUDIO
EU-9124 6 IN R
(OPTION) Over Video RGB
Independent 4 AUDIO
Probe Lay Memory DAC. OUT R VCR (O p t io n )
1 Beam Processor 1 1 1
EU-9110 TMDS AUDIO
Timing EU-9104 EU-9103
%+'*)!&-,()..,-!"! Video IN L
(OPTION) ET& V CR
Processor Phisyo DSP Plane Enc. A U D IO
CTRL Cine OUT L
RF Mode DSC
Select Processor IEEE Y /C
Mecha Echo Plane 1394 V ID EO IN 1 D VR (O p t io n )
Probe A/D Process Mode DSC
Y /C
ID Timing Video V I D EO O UT
Control LineCorr. Line Mode Dec.
Echo DSC CO MP
AIP Process Physio V I D EO
OUT
Probe
Monitor D/A & Mixer & DVI
DOP WI Audio AMP Selector
Process DVI 3
Prn.&VCR
Process 1 2 %+'*)!&-,()..,-!$
EU-9102(OPTION) Control
Plane iLink
Control Cine Mode DSC 2 3 Peripheral I/O2 B
Beam Processor 2 Line Mode E CG/RE SP IN
DSC P CG IN
Flow
Process JPEG P U L SE IN
Enc. Physio E CG D C IN
RF AMP P CG D C IN
Process iLink PEU-ALPHA10
Control Power
Back Plane Conv. I/O PSU-ALPHA10 (OPTION)

SSD-ALPHA10 Ver.6~Ver.7 (M01706~)

TITLE MODEL 1
SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM SSD-ALPHA10 1

4 - 73
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

(Blank Page)

4 - 74
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

4-4 Principle of System Operation

4-4-1 System Control

CPU board
This CPU board controls entire operation of the system.
This is generic computer and it controls the HDD, the disk drives and the display of LCD.
It also communicates with PC boards in the machine via PCI BUS and the Operation Panel
via USB.
The HDD contains/stores;
& The program of SSD-ALPHA10
& The programs for peripheral processors
(It’s transferred to Flash Memory when a specific command is executed)
& The transmission waveform data for each probe
& The focus data of Tx/Rx circuitries for each probe.
& The parameter data of scan conversion for each probe.
& The presets, the image data and the patient information database.

The probe specific data is transferred from the HDD to each parts by CPU when it’s
required during the operation.
The disk drives can be used for the following functions.
& SSD-ALPHA10 S/N: ~M01530
Function MO USB*2
FD CD-R
(Media1) (Media2)
Upgrading " - " -
*1
Backup/Restore of the preset data " " "
Backup/Read-out of the image data*3 " " " "
Backup/Restore of the patient database " " - "
& SSD-ALPHA10 S/N: M01531~
Function MO DVD
FD CD-R
(Media1) -RAM
Upgrading " - " -
*1
Backup/Restore of the preset data " " "
Backup/Read-out of the image data*3 " " " "
Backup/Restore of the patient database " " - -
*1: Backup is impossible by CD-R but restore is possible.
*2: Ver.5~: Only USB flash memory is available. (Option JB-284 is
required)
M01531~: Only USB flash memory is available (Standard).
However, any USB devices are available on all function of
Maintenance menu.
*3: Destination for image retrieve is only “Local HD2”.

4 - 75
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

Main Panel: L-KEY-84* (Operation Panel)

Main Panel reads the status of switches, potentiometers, full keyboard and trackball then
communicates with the CPU via USB.
Main Panel includes the 8.4 inches SVGA colour LCD with touch screen as well.
The video is displayed directly from the CPU and the status of LCD panel (Touch screen
and encoders) is transferred to the CPU with other panel information by serial
communication.

Address bus, Data bus

For controlling the system, the machine is equipped with the address/data bus below.
UC Bus: Ultrasonic Beam Forming Control BUS. It is used for accessing to the
control register of Tx/Rx part
UAT Bus: Ultrasonic Acquisition Timing BUS. It provides clock and timing
signals for transmission/reception of ultrasound. Timing Processor
generates those timing signals.
USC Bus: Ultrasonic System Control BUS. It connects the Tx/Rx part and the
DIU part.
cPCI Bus: Compact PCI BUS. It connects the CPU and the DIU part. CPU
accesses to each hardware via this bus and controlling the registers
and transferring the data.
There is Bus Bridge between PCI BUS and UC BUS. It connects both bus only when the
CPU accesses to Tx/Rx part in order to avoid the system noise leaking into it.

4 - 76
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

4 - 77
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

4 - 78
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

4 - 79
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

(Blank Page)

4 - 80
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

4-4-2 Tx/Rx unit

Tx/Rx unit consists of;
Probe Connector part
Tx/Rx part
Digital Beam Former part
Beam Processor part
In addition, the following module/unit are installed in Tx/Rx unit.
Independent probe connection unit: EU-9110 (Option, Ver.3.0.0. and higher)
Mechanical scanning probe connection unit:
EU-9109 (Option, Ver.4.0.0. and higher, M01705 and before)
EU-9124 (Option, Ver.4.0.0. and higher, M01706 and after)

Probe Connector part

It has connectors for electric probes (Phased array, Linear, Convex, Compound array, VOL
scanner and Motorized TEE probe).
Probe Selector board is equipped with HVS (High Voltage Switch) that select the channels
of transmission from the entire transducers when Linear/Convex probe is connected. This
board controls the HVS as well.
Unlike conventional machines, SSD-ALPHA10 doesn’t require a control cable for VOL
mode scanner and Motorized TEE probe since those controls have been included in the pin
assignment.
Furthermore, SSD-APLHA10 adopted new ID for probes that includes not only probe
code but also serial number of the probe. This ID is planted in the probe connector and a
machine reads out the information from it.
It is possible to connect conventional probes as well.

Tx/Rx part
SSD-ALPHA10 adopted different transmission method from conventional machines that it
transmits ultrasound by applying not a single pulse but a waveform. The data of Tx
waveform, focus, apodization are kept in the HDD and it is transferred to the memory of
Tx Generator, calculated in accordance with the condition of Tx/Rx setting. The Wave
Generator creates Tx waveform processing those data then passed to electric probes.
This method makes it possible to create variety of waveform based on sine curve
Received echo is amplified by Pre Amp. in Wave Generator and then, passed to TGC Amp.
in Front End Controller in order to adjust the signal level to the A/D converter at the input
of the Rx Beam Former.
In the case of STCW, the Wave Generator do the transmission in the same way. The
waveform is generated repeatedly so that it makes continuous transmission. The echo
signal is amplified by the Pre Amp. And then go through the quadrature detector in Wave
Generator. Then it passed to A/D converter in Mech. Front End and transferred to Beam
Processor 1.

4 - 81
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

Digital Beam Former part

The reception signal (analog) passed from TGC Amp. is converted to digital signal. Then
the signal for each channel is delayed in accordance with the Rx focus data and added into
an ultrasound beam.
& The delay is processed digitally as a readout from FIFO memory is delayed by
processing clock etc., that makes it possible to have accurate delays continuously.
(Dynamic reception focusing). It also has the functionality that it adjusts the
weighting of each reception signal continuously that makes the Rx beam sharper.
This is digital signal so that it makes possible to do parallel processing by time
sharing operation. Then it is able to improve the frame rate.
Rx Pixel Focusing
%Rx continuous dynamic focusing&

Delay-Depth
Delay

Ideal delay
Analog Beam former
Digital Beam former
Depth

& It implements Rx Beam former (Three PC boards with 32 ch circuitry for M01050
and before, one PC board with 96 ch circuitry for M01051 and after) as the Delay &
Adder.
& This system does not have the trouble that shows brightness difference in every 1cm
depth caused by one of the Rx focus boards (Delay and Adder circuit), like
SSD-650, 1200, and 2000 etc.

The US beam from Rx Beam Former is processed by VBPF (Filtering the echo data
according to the depth) in Timing Processor, then passed to Beam Processor 1.
Also, the US beam from Rx Beam Former is processed by detector and filtering in Timing
Processor and then passed to Beam Processor 1 for Doppler analysis. The same data is
transferred to Beam Processor 2 as well for color flow calculation.
Tx & Rx part also has the following circuitry:
The generator of control signal for Rx signal, such as Pre STC and STC signal.
Timing/Control signal generator for Tx/Rx unit.
Motor control for VOL mode scanner and Mechanical scanning probe.
Interface of physiological signal.
Control part for Mother driven TEE probes.

4 - 82
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

Beam Processor part

Beam Processor part contains Beam Processor 1 and Beam Processor 2.
Beam Processor 1 is for processing of B/W echo, analyzing PW/CW Doppler signal,
processing of eTracking (Ver.3~) and the interface of physiological signal. Beam Processor
2 is for color flow calculation.

For B, M mode data, the RF signal from Timing Processor is processed by detection, LOG
compression, AGC, Relief, Contrast etc. (It has two, the same circuitry for parallel
processing), then go through the pre-processing below.
AIP(Ver.6~): It detect the direction and strength of border of difference object, and
then makes edge enhancement and/or smoothing process for the
direction. The speckle noise in the parenchyma is suppressed and the
contour of the edge of the organ is enhanced. In addition, Both AIP
and Edge Optimizer does not work simultaneously.
Edge Optimizer(Ver.6~):
It detect the border line on image. Then improves the connection of
border line by edge enhance. In addition, Both AIP and Edge
Optimizer does not work simultaneously.
Line correlation: It correlates the same depth of data between neighbouring Ultrasound
beam and makes the lateral smoothness better and reducing noise. In
addition, the line correlation is not applied on AIP images.
Frame correlation:It correlates the same position of data among the previous frames of
image and makes the smoothness better in time aspect and reducing
noise.
Then, it adds attributes, such as data type, time stamp and beam number etc., then
transferred to DIU part via BUS LVDS.

For PW Doppler data, the RF signal from Timing Processor that is processed by
quadrature detection, is used and for CW Doppler data and Analog PW Doppler
data(Ver.6~, M01706 and after), it comes from Mecha Frontend. Both data is analyzed by
FFT in Beam Processor 1.
Then, it adds attributes data, and then transferred to DIU part via BUS LVDS.

For Color flow data, the RF signal from Timing Processor that is processed by quadrature
detection, is used as well. The data is processed by Beam Processor 2 that consists of
Corner Turning Memory that stores the Rx data for number of time that is set by Color
Average, then go through the Wall Motion filter (Ver.6~, Addition of Advanced Wall
Motion filter only for eFlow) and auto correlation process (Correlating the data with a
beam before then calculate velocity, variance and power). After that, it goes through noise
filter and spatial filter then passed to frame correlation.
Then, it adds attributes data, and then transferred to DIU part via BUS LVDS.

4 - 83
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

(Blank Page)

4 - 84
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

SSD-ALPHA10 Ver.2~Ver.3 (~M00300)

4 - 85
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

SSD-ALPHA10 Ver.3~Ver.5 (M00301~M01050)

4 - 86
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

SSD-ALPHA10 Ver.5~ (M01051~M01240)

4 - 87
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

SSD-ALPHA10 Ver.6 (M01241~M01705)

4 - 88
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

SSD-ALPHA10 Ver.6~Ver.7 (M01706~)

4 - 89
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

(Blank Page)

4 - 90
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

4-4-3 Digital Imaging Unit

Digital Imaging Unit consists of the following parts;
CPU part which controls whole ultrasound diagnostic equipment
Mass memory part which stores Ultrasound information
Scan converter part which converts Ultrasound information into SVGA signal in order to
display Viewing monitor
Interface circuit with the peripheral equipment
And this parts has the following features;
& Most of PC boards use a flash memory for the program ROM. The flash memory is
erasable and rewritable on the board.
& Mass memory part whose capacity is 65,536 records (Ver.3~: 524,288 records, B/W for
Stress Echo: 1,048,579 records) and length varies.
& Scan converter part which adopts 2 dimensional interpolation.
& RGB # NTSC/PAL CODEC by digital processing
In addition, the following module/unit are installed in DIU unit.
& Image Processor 2 board of KI/A-SMA, CW and WT unit: EU-9100 (Option, Ver.4.0.0.
and higher)
& Image Processor 3 board of Host Interface unit: EU-9102 (Option for Lite version)
& Peripheral I/O 2 board of DV-800 connection kit: PM-A10-H001/PM-A10-H001B
(Option, Ver.4.0.0 and higher, Only for M00950 and before)
& Peripheral I/O 2 board of DV I/O kit: PM-A10-H006 (Option, Only for M00951 and after)
& DV board of DV output kit: PM-A10-H007 (Option, Only for M00951 and after)
(DV board is mounted on Video Processor board)

BLVDS (Bus LVDS)

Tx/Rx unit sends the Rx data to DIU, every line. This transfer of Rx data use the defined
exclusive bus named Bus-LVDS. Bus-LVDS is prepared 4 separated data bus (called
“LINK”) for B/W, Color(Velocity/Power, Variance and property), Graphic and RF data.
After completed one Rx line, Tx/Rx unit outputs Record Trigger signal to DIU which need
processed data in order to pass beginning of data transfer to them, and receives Trigger
Ready signal from DIU, then send Rx data to DIU via Bus-LVDS,

Tx/Rx unit Digital Imaging unit

Timing Processor Beam Processor 1 Beam Processor 2 Image Processor 1 Image Processor 3

BLVDS BLVDS BLVDS BLVDS BLVDS

Tx Tx Tx Rx Rx

Record Trigger *
Target Ready ) (Ver.7~)

B/D
Color
Graphic
RF

Bus-LVDS

4 - 91
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

Mass Memory part

Mass memory has the capacity of 65,536 (524,288 on Ver.3 and later) records (lines) for
B/W, Velocity, Variance and Property respectively and 458,752 (1,835,008 on Ver.3 and
later) records (lines) for Graphic data such as physiological data. In the case of Stress scan,
Mass memory has the capacity of 1,048,576 records (lines) by using mass memory for
both B/W and color. And it is used for real-time display, Cine memory’s
SEARCH/STORE/REVIEW and Mass Memory due to change the Gain for frozen image.
Further, there is the frame interpolation process (Frame Accelerator) for Velocity, which
makes color variation in time smooth at real-time display.
8 bits

Mass Memory for B/W 512

pixels B/W

65,536 lines (Ver.3~: 524,288 lines)

1,048,576 lines (Ver.3~, Stress Scan)

8 bits

512
pixels Velocity or Power

65,536 lines (Ver.3~: 524,288 lines)

4 bits

512
Mass Memory for Color pixels Variance

65,536 lines (Ver.3~: 524,288 lines)

4 bits

512
pixels Property

65,536 lines

16 bits

Mass Memory for Graphic 16

ECG, PCG etc.
bytes

458,752 lines (Ver.3~: 1,835,008) lines

Scan Converter part

Data from Mass Memory is converted to the display format, by 2 dimensional
interpolation and written into the display memory (video memory).

2 Dimensional Interpolation (with 4 points)

4 - 92
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

On following display mode, the parameter of 2 dimensional interpolation changes to 16

points from 4 points.
- eFlow (ver.2.1~), Power CHE (Ver.4.0~), B/W (Ver.4.1~)

2 Dimensional Interpolation (with 16 points)

Data from Video Memory is read out in TV scan direction, then sent to Post Process part.

Post Process part (Video Process part)

The signal passes through the addition of Gray scale bar / Color bar / VCR counter display
/ heart mark, and decision of display priority, B/W enhancement and Color coding from
Velocity/Variance to RGB, then outputted to the Color TV monitor.
Further, there are Encoder/decoder circuit for VCR output/input, and the digital video
output circuit of Motion JPEG function.
The connectors on Peripheral I/O board output the signal to external printer and
input/output the signal for VCR.

CPU part
This CPU controls whole Ultrasound diagnostic equipment.
This CPU controls DIU and Connected with Tx/Rx unit via USC Bus. On the other hand,
the CPU is connected to Operation panel by serial communication by USB.

Timing generator part

The Video Processor board generates the timing for DIU and TV display monitor. The
Image Processor 1 board generates the Vector data for 2 dimensional interpolation.

4 - 93
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

(Blank Page)

4 - 94
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

SSD-ALPHA10 Ver.2 (~M00200)

4 - 95
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

SSD-ALPHA10 Ver.2~Ver.5
(M00201~M00950)

4 - 96
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

SSD-ALPHA10 Ver.5~Ver.6
(M00951~M01590)

4 - 97
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

SSD-ALPHA10 Ver.6~ (M01591~)

4 - 98
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

4-4-4 Physiological Signal Display unit PEU-ALPHA10*

Physio. Signal display unit consists of Amplifier part for physiological signal and A/D convert
part (Physio. Amp board)
Each physiological signal amplifies and converts from analog signal to digital signal on the
Physio amp board. Then these signals send to the Beam Processor 1 board as serial data. On the
beam processor 1 board, these data convert from serial to parallel, then adjust the sensitivity and
position. After that these data convert to graphic data, and then send to DIU part via Bus LVDS.
In addition, the Beam processor 1 board controls setting of Hum filter, PCG filter and Drift filter
on the physio. Amp board.
On the SSD-ALPHA10, Generation of ECG sound and R-Sync mark is processed on Video
Processor board.

Physio signal display unit PEU-ALPHA10* Block diagram

4 - 99
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

4-4-5 Power Supply unit PSU-ALPHA10

The power supply unit is consists of Main-power supply unit (EU-6030*) to generated
low-voltage, Sub-Power supply unit (EU-6031*) to generated high-voltage and provides various
kinds of voltage that are required by main unit. It also provides the isolated power to the
peripherals (Recorders).
The transmission voltage (+/- 70V) for electric probes and High-voltage (+/- 90V) for HVS are
provided by sub-Power supply unit. The transmission voltage (+150V, Ver.3~) for mechanical
probes is controlled by the control signal (DATA0~5) from the main unit.

For the fuse location, refer to

the circuit diagram.

Power Supply unit PSU-ALPHA10 Block diagram (M00950 and before)

4 - 100
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

For the fuse location, refer to

the circuit diagram.

Power Supply unit PSU-ALPHA10 Block diagram (M00951 and after)

In addition, the power on/off sequence is controlled by MPU on the Power I/O board follows;
& Power On sequence
1) When you turn on only the breaker switch, +5VSB and Ac output for DVD are
outputted.
2) When you turn on both beaker switch and Stand by switch, MPU on the Power I/O
board send Power-On signal to the CPU board.
3) After the CPU receive the Power-on signal, The CPU send ”PS_ON” signal to the MPU
on the Power I/O board.
4) After the MPU on the power I/O board receive the “PS_ON” signal, The MPU
send ”PWR_OK” signal to the Power supply unit. And then whole system start up.

& Power Off sequence

1) When you turn off the Stand by switch, MPU send “Power-off” signal to the operation
panel. And then the Operation panel send “PWR_OFF” signal to the CPU board via
USB.
2) After the CPU (Operation System) detects the “PWR_OFF” signal, System starts the
shutdown process.

4 - 101
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 4 Principle of System Operation

3) After the MPU detect shutdown completion information, the MPU send the power-off
signal to the power supply unit. Then turn SSD-ALPHA10’s power off except +5VSB
and AC output for DVD. In addition, MPU has the function to send the power-off signal
to the power supply unit after defined time, even if the CPU (Operation System) does
not shutdown fro whatever reason.

4-4-6 Viewing Color TV Monitor

The parts number of TV monitor is depending on the serial number as table below.
Serial number Input signal Parts number Notes
M01590 and Analog RGB IPC-1710* Available for AC100~120V and
earlier AC200V~240V
Resolution: SVGA
M01591 and TMDS (DVI) IPF-1901 Available for AC100~240V with
later AC adapter
Resolution: SVGA
(OPTION: for M01590 and
earlier)

IPC-1710*:
The CPU internally equipped switches the input power voltage 100V/200V. And this is 17
inches color CRT monitor only for SGVA.
This CPU is also providing the OSD (On-Screen Display) function, which enables the
monitor configuration on screen. Please refer to Section 6 for this function.

IPF-1901:
The CPU internally equipped, and switches the input power voltage 100V/200V with AC
adapter for this monitor. And this is 19 inches color LCD monitor only for SGVA.
This CPU is also providing the OSD (On-Screen Display) function. Please refer to Section
6 for this function.

4 - 102
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SSD-ALPHA10 SERVICE MANUAL

Contents of SSD-ALPHA10 SERVICE MANUAL 2/2

PAGE

Section 6 TROUBLE SHOOTING page 6-1~6-2 (2 pages)

6-1 Introduction ························································································· 6- 1

Section 7 ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE page 7-1~7-2 (2 pages)

7-1 Introduction ························································································· 7- 1

Section 8 PERFORMANCE CHECK page 8-1~8-20 (20 pages)

8-1 Introduction ························································································· 8- 1
8-2 Attention ····························································································· 8- 1
8-3 Making Entries in Repair Report ························································· 8- 1
8-4 Performance Check ············································································· 8- 2
8-4-1 Functional Check ································································· 8- 3
8-4-2 Image Quality Check ··························································· 8 - 12
8-4-3 Safety Check········································································ 8 - 16

Section 9 DISASSEMBLING PROCEDURE page 9-1~9-156 (182 pages)

SSD-ALPHA10 Disassembling Procedure ····················································· 9- 1

Section 10 PARTS LIST page 10-1~10-58 (58 pages)

10-1 Contents of Parts List ·········································································· 10 - 1
10-2 Appliance of Parts List ········································································ 10 - 2
10-3 Outline of Parts List ············································································ 10 - 2
10-4 Explanation of Parts List ····································································· 10 - 3
10-5 Attention ····························································································· 10 - 4
10-6 Parts List ····························································································· 10 - 5

Section 11 SERVICE INFORMATION page 11-1~11-2 (2 pages)

11-1 Introduction ························································································· 11 - 1

Appendix SSD-ALPHA10 SERVICE MANUAL Appendix page Apndx-1~Apndx-2 (2 pages)

Appendix-1 Introduction ·············································································· Apndx -1

Appendix-2 Manual Change Information ····················································· Apndx -1

1/2
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SSD-ALPHA10 SERVICE MANUAL

Contents of SSD-ALPHA10 SERVICE MANUAL 1/2

Section 1 How to use this service manual

Section 2 PRECAUTIONS

Section 3 BEFORE REPAIRING

Section 4 PRINCIPLE OF SYTSTEM OPERATION

Section 5 SCHEMATICS

2/2
 SECTION 6

TROUBLESHOOTING

SECTION 6
 MN2-2008
SECTION 6 Troubleshooting

6-1 Introduction

In this revision of the service manual, there is no description on this section.

6-1
MN2-2008
SECTION 6 Troubleshooting

(Blank page)

6-2
 SECTION 7

ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

SECTION 7
 MN2-2008
SECTION 7 Adjustment Procedure

7-1 Introduction

SSD-ALPHA10 is fully digitized machine, so there is no part requires to be adjusted at the field.

7-1
MN2-2008
SECTION 7 Adjustment Procedure

(Blank page)

7-2
 SECTION 8

PERFORMANCE CHECK

SECTION 8
 MN2-2008 Rev.1
SECTION 8 Performance Check

8-1 Introduction

"Performance Check” describes the items to be confirmed for the maintenance of an equipment quality
and safety under the circumstances referred to below.
" Once a repair work has been done,
" Once an improvement, for a problem or the like, has been made,
" Once a change as to upgrade the functions and/or specifications has been made,
" When a periodic inspection is made.

8-2 Attention

# CAUTION # During the disk access, DO NOT turn the system power off. If you turn the
system power off during the disk access, All or a part of data on the internal hard
disk will be destroyed.

Unless otherwise specified, this performance check must be conducted with all coverings attached in
place and under the following environments:
" 30 minutes or more have passed after throwing the stand-by switch ON.
" If DICOM network is used, it should be connected properly.

If the performance check specified herein should be conducted after a repair, an improvement or an
upgrade, make certain of the following:
" All the PCBs removed are reconnected properly.
" All the connectors removed are reconnected properly.
" The replaced ROM and others are mounted in place on a printed circuit board.
The power pin, in particular, should NEVER be mistaken for the GND pin.
" The unnecessary ROM is NOT left behind inside the equipment.
" Tool, measuring probe, and the like are NOT left behind inside the equipment.
" Optional components and grounding cable are properly reconnected.
" Screws and the like are NOT left behind inside the equipment.

8-3 Making Entries in Repair Report

Upon completion of the check, enter findings thereof in such a form as repair report or the like. And
present it to the user. Keep a copy thereof in custody.

8-1
MN2-2008 Rev.1
SECTION 8 Performance Check

8-4 Performance Check

Those items which are covered by a performance check vary, in principle, with what is done for the
operation requiring the check. In accordance with the chart given below, identify an item or items
required (those marked with " in the chart). And check each of the items so marked.
The terms referred to in the chart, meanwhile, are defined, respectively, as follows:
- Power supply unit: ............. Power supply unit, Isolation Transformer and Power switch.
- Other unit: .......................... Units other than Power supply unit.
CHECK ITEM
Check Requiring Operation Image REMARKS
Function Safety
Quality
Replacing parts inside power supply unit. " " " Including PCB replacement.
Replacing the power supply unit as a whole " "
Replacing parts inside physiological signal Including PCB replacement.
" " "
display unit
Replacing physiological signal display unit
" "
as a whole
Replacing a PCB in units other than that the
" "
above.
Replacing parts on PCB in other units. " " Including ROM replacement.
Replacing units other than that referred to Including a probe and scanner.
" "
above as a whole.
Performance check before the upgrade or
" "
improvement
Periodic inspection " " "

What be checked in each of the check items, meanwhile, is given on the pages described below, to
which you are requested to refer.
Functional Check......................................... Item 8-4-1 from Page 8-3 and on
Image Quality Check ................................... Item 8-4-2 from Page 8-12 and on
Safety Check................................................ Item 8-4-3 from Page 8-16 and on
* Refer to the Electrical Safety Check Manual: MN2-0205 to check safety.

If a specified performance or rating should be found unsatisfied as a result of the check, the equipment
should be deemed failed.
Now, refer to “Section 6 Troubleshooting” to dissolve the failure.

8-2
 MN2-2008 Rev.1
SECTION 8 Performance Check

8-4-1 Functional check

Using the operation panel of the equipment, you can check the operative condition of the function
corresponding to each panel switch.
1) Checking the panel switch operation
When any PCB around the panel or any switch on the panel is replaced, particularly check
the condition of the key top (cap). If the key top position is shifted, the switch may not
operate normally.
" Panel LED lamps
During system booting-up, check that all green LED lamps light, and all orange LED
lamps except “DEPTH” and “VEL RANGE” light.

" KEY BOARD

Input of all the characters, ESC, Tab, Caps Lock, Shift, Ctrl, ID, Comment, Enter, Delete,
Arrow key, F1~F13 key.

" New Patient

The patient entry screen must be displayed normally.

" End Patient

The function assigned by PRESET must operate.

" MODE
When selecting B, B/B, M, CW, PW, FLOW or POWER FLOW, each image must be
displayed normally.

" VEL RANGE

In Doppler/FLOW mode, the velocity range must be increased or decreased.

" SELECT
In B/* mode, the select screen must be switched.

" USER1$USER2$USER3
The function assigned by PRESET must operate.

" Print(L)$Print(R)
The recorder or function assigned by PRESET must operate.

" REC
The recorder or function assigned by PRESET must operate.

2) Image display function

The following functions must operate normally.
" DEPTH/RANGE
In B mode, the image display magnification must be increased or reduced.

" IMAGE DIRECTIONAL(UL)/INVERT

In B mode, the image display must be flip horizontal/vertical.

" IMAGE ROTATION

In B mode, the image display must be rotate at 90 degree step.

" SCAN AREA (Freeze OFF)

When you select the SCAN AREA switch in B mode and turn the rotary encoder in
counterclockwise, the scan area must be narrowed and the frame rate must increase. You
must be able to steer within the maximum sight with the trackball.

8-3
MN2-2008 Rev.1
SECTION 8 Performance Check

" ZOOM
When you select the ZOOM switch in B mode and turn the rotary encoder, the image
must be reduced or magnified (CW: Magnify, CCW: Reduce). The position must be
moved (vertically, horizontally) with the trackball.

" CURSOR/B.L.S
The cursor must be displayed when you select the CURSOR/B.L.S. switch in B/M mode.
When you operate the trackball, the cursor direction must catch up with it in real time
and M-MODE must be displayed corresponding to the cursor position.
In PW mode, when you operate the trackball, the base-line must move and the Doppler
spectrum must be displayed.

" FOCUS
The FOCUS menu must be displayed on the touch panel by selecting the FOCUS switch
in B mode. When you operate the trackball, the focus mark on the monitor must catch up
with it in real time and the focus point of the ultrasound image must change.

" BODY MARK

When you select the switch assigned to BODY MARK, the body mark must appear on
the LCD touch panel and the selected body mark must be displayed on the monitor.

" SEARCH
After freezing in B/M mode, searching for the M image with the trackball and searching
for the B image with the rotary encoder must be possible.

" STORE/REVIEW %Freeze ON&

After moving the trackball or rotary encoder in the search state in B/M mode, when you
store the displayed image and review the stored image, the stored B/M image must be
displayed.

" SWEEP SPEED %Freeze OFF&

For the M mode image, the sweep speed must be adjusted by the SWEEP SPEED(M) on
the LCD touch panel.

" ECHO ERASE %Freeze OFF&

The M mode image must be erased from the bottom to the center by the ECHO ERASE
function on the LCD touch panel.

" SPECTRUM INVERT

The PW mode image must invert by the INVERT function.

8-4
 MN2-2008 Rev.1
SECTION 8 Performance Check

3) Image adjusting function

The following functions must operate normally.
" B-GAIN
In B/M mode, both gains must be adjusted by turning the GAIN control knob (CW:
Increase, CCW: Decrease).
The GAIN display must change from 30 to 90.
* The gain display for M-mode is depend on preset setting of GAIN(M).

" STC
The gains of the B mode image must be adjusted corresponding to their depths. When all
the STC controls are centered, they must be free of excessive variations in sensitivity.

" )MAGE FREQUENCY (Freeze OFF)

When you select the Image Freq (B/M) on the LCD touch panel in B mode, the
frequency of the ultrasound must be switched.

" FRAME CORRELATION (Freeze OFF)

For the B mode image, the level of frame correlation must be adjusted by Frame
Corre(B) on the LCD touch panel.

" AGC (Freeze OFF)

The AGC for the B mode image must be adjusted by turning the AGC(B) on the LCD
touch panel.
The AGC display must change from A1 to A15.

" SMOOTHING(B) (Freeze OFF)

In the B/M mode, the smoothness of B mode image must be adjusted by Smoothing(B)
on the LCD touch panel.

" CONTRAST (Freeze OFF)

The contrast of the M mode image must be adjusted by Contrast(M) on the LCD touch
panel.
The contrast display must change from C1 to C16.

" M/D-GAIN (Freeze OFF)

The gain of both M mode and Doppler mode images must be adjusted by turning the
M/D-GAIN control knob (CW: Increase, CCW: Decrease).

" ACOUSTIC POWER (Freeze OFF)

The image sensitivity must change by pressing the ACOUSTIC POWER switch in B
mode and turning the rotary encoder.
The DVA display must change corresponding to the adjustment.

" SAMPLE VOLUME (Freeze OFF)

In the PW mode, the size of sample volume must be adjusted by Sample Volume on the
LCD touch panel.

" DOP FILTER (Freeze OFF)

In the PW mode, the noise around the baseline must change by Filter(D) on the LCD
touch panel.

" FLOW-GAIN (Freeze OFF)

The gain of the Flow mode image must be adjusted by turning the FLOW-GAIN control
knob (CW: Increase, CCW: Decrease).
The GAIN display must change from 00 to 127.

8-5
MN2-2008 Rev.1
SECTION 8 Performance Check

" FLOW FILTER (Freeze OFF)

In the B/Flow mode, the flow filter for the flow image must be adjusted by Filter(Flow)
on the LCD touch panel.

" FRAME RATE ACCELERATOR (Freeze OFF)

In the B/Flow mode, the link between frames of Flow image must change by setting
Frame Rate Acceleration to ON.

" SMOOTHING(FLOW) (Freeze OFF)

In the B/Flow mode, the smoothness of Flow mode image must be adjusted by
Smoothing(Flow) on the LCD touch panel.

8-6
 MN2-2008 Rev.1
SECTION 8 Performance Check

4) FUNCTION
The following functions must operate normally.
" PROBE
The kinds, model names or probe connector number of all the probes connected must be
displayed correctly on the LCD touch panel. The image selected probe is displayed
correctly without missing echo and unnecessary noise.

" PRESET
The preset menu must be displayed and the preset selected must be started. The preset
must be registered on the Set Up Menu screen. Even if the power is once turned off, the
preset registered must not be erased.

" MENU
The active mode menu must be displayed automatically.

" TISSUE HARMONIC ECHO

With Tissue Harmonic Echo compatible probe (UST-9130, UST-52101 and so on), It
should alter the image to Tissue Harmonic Image when you turn the T.H.E. to ON.

" FREE ANGULAR M-MODE (with optional SOP-ALPHA10-5 installed)

In the FAM mode, M mode image must be displayed corresponding to cursor on B mode
image and location of sample gate.

" ECHO TRACKING (with optional SOP-ALPHA10-11 installed)

In the B/M mode with eTracking compatible probe (UST-5411 and so on), Tracking gate
must be displayed by selecting ET switch on the LCD touch panel.
Tracking and distension wave on M mode image must change corresponding to the
position of tracking gate.
The Arterial Stiffness measurement must operate normally with acquired Echo Tracking
data.

" Stress Echo (with optional SOP-ALPHA10-15B installed)

In the B mode with UST-52101, the Stress Echo mode must be started by selecting
“Stress E” switch on the LCD touch panel.
The acquired image with four or more cardiac cycles must be displayed correctly.

" STCW Doppler

With STCW Doppler compatible probe (UST-52101 and so on), CW mode image must
be displayed correctly during more than ten second.

5) MEASUREMENT functions
The following measurement functions must operate normally.
" DISTANCE
DISTANCE measurement function must operate normally.

6) Disk drive
The following disk drives must work correctly.
" Floppy disk drive
The preset data must be copied to Floppy disk from Preset Control Screen. And the
preset data must be restored from floppy disk.

" MO disk drive

The preset data must be copied to MO disk from Preset Control Screen. And the preset
data must be restored from MO disk.

8-7
MN2-2008 Rev.1
SECTION 8 Performance Check

" CD-R drive

Any images must be copied to CD-R from Review screen. And copied images must be
displayed on review screen.

" USB flash memory (OPTION: With the JB-284 connected)

The preset data must be copied to USB flash memory from Preset Control Screen. And
the preset data must be restored from USB flash memory.

7) Network
The following network functions must operate normally. It is not necessary to confirm the
functions not in use.
" Worklist (with optional SOP-ALPHA10-10 installed)
Worklist ping and Worklist C-ECHO must success on Common preset screen.
Scheduled patient list must be displayed by pressing Find button on New patient screen.

" Image storage (With optional SOP-ALPHA10-10 installed)

Remote ping and Remote C-ECHO must success on Common preset screen.
Single and multi-frame must transfer to the DICOM server correctly.

" MPPS (With optional SOP-ALPHA10-10 installed)

Ping and C-ECHO for MPPS (Modality Performed Procedure Step) server must success
on Common preset screen.
MPPS screen must be displayed by changing patient or pressing End Study switch.
MPPS command must send to the MPPS server correctly.

" Storage Commitment (With optional SOP-ALPHA10-10 installed)

Ping and C-ECHO for Storage Commitment server must success on Common preset
screen.
The color of icon on thumbnail screen must be changed to dark blue within defined
period on IHE screen.

" SR (With optional SOP-ALPHA10-10 and SOP-ALPHA10-21 installed)

Ping and C-ECHO for SR (Structured Report) server must success on Common preset
screen.
Created SR data must transfer to the SR server.

8) Photographing unit
Before making the following checks, check that the photographing unit is connected properly.
" Analog thermal printer
(OPTION: UP-895*, UP-897*, UP21MD*, P93* and/or CP900* connected)
When you press the photographing unit Rec switch set by the preset, the same image as
displayed on the monitor must be recorded. The recorded image must be free of skew, tilt,
and image missing. The image printed by the color printer must be free of tint and color
misalignment.

" Digital thermal printer (OPTION: UP-D897 and/or UP-D23MD connected)

When you press the photographing unit Rec switch set by the preset, the same image as
displayed on the monitor must be recorded. The recorded image must be free of skew, tilt,
and image missing. The image printed by the color printer must be free of tint and color
misalignment.

9) PC printer (OPTION)
Before making the following checks, check that the PC printer is connected properly.
When you press the PC printer Rec switch set by the preset, the same image as displayed on
the monitor must be recorded. And also when you select report printing, report screen must
be printed corresponding to the settings. The printed image must be free of skew, tilt, and

8-8
 MN2-2008 Rev.1
SECTION 8 Performance Check

image missing. The image printed by the color printer must be free of tint and color
misalignment.

10) VCR (OPTION: With the SVO-9500MD(P)2 or HV-MD3000*(2) connected)

Before performing the following checks, check that the VCR is connected properly.
" External input
An external input image from the VCR must be output to the monitor with the EXT
switch. The image must be displayed correctly without synchronization failure, etc.

" FREEZE
The VCR playback image must be made freeze with the FREEZE switch.

" Playback measurement

With the VCR playback image made freeze, measurement of the playback image must be
possible.

" Audio
The audio must be recorded and played back normally.
In addition, when you connect microphone to MIC connector on the operation panel, this
audio must also be recorded and played back normally.

" Remote control

The REC, and Pause for the VCR must be controlled from the EXT menu on the LCD
touch panel.
The counter must be displayed on TV monitor during the recording. And the counter
must change during the played back normally.

11) DVD-recorder (OPTION: With the BD-X201M* or DVO-1000MD connected)

Before performing the following checks, check that the DVD-recorder is connected properly.
" External input
An external input image from the DVD-recorder must be output to the monitor with the
EXT switch. The image must be displayed correctly without synchronization failure, etc.

" FREEZE
The DVD-recorder playback image must be made freeze with the FREEZE switch.

" Playback measurement

With the DVD-recorder playback image made freeze, measurement of the playback
image must be possible.

" Audio
The audio must be recorded and played back normally.
In addition, when you connect microphone to MIC connector on the operation panel, this
audio must also be recorded and played back normally.

" Remote control

The Play, and Pause for the DVD-recorder must be controlled from the EXT menu on the
LCD touch panel.
The counter must be displayed on TV monitor during the recording. And the counter
must change during the played back normally.

12) FOOT SWITCH (OPTION: With the MP-2345* or MP-2614* connected)

Operation of the functions assigned by the preset must be possible.

8-9
MN2-2008 Rev.1
SECTION 8 Performance Check

13) Physiological signal display unit (OPTION: With the PEU-ALPHA10* connected)
Connect the ECG cable with a human body or simulator, then connect to the physiological
signal display unit. Connect the PCG cable and Pulse cable, then perform the following check
operations.
" MODE
When you press the ECG Display on the LCD touch screen, ECG waveform and heart
rate must appear on the B mode image.
When you press the PCG Display and Pulse Display on the LCD touch screen, PCG and
Pulse waveform must appear on the B mode image.
ECG, PCG and Pulse waveform must be displayed on the M image and no unnecessary
noise must be contained in them.
Each SENSE operation must allow the amplitude of the waveform to change and the
POSITION operation must allow the waveform to move from the top to the bottom of the
M image.

" R-WAVE BEEP

When you press the R Wave Beep on the LCD touch screen, a "beep" tone must be heard
synchronizing with the rise of the ECG waveform (R wave).

" ECG SYNC

When you press the B/Sync Mode on the LCD touch screen, the 2B display must appear,
the SYNC mark must appear at the rise of the ECG waveform (R wave), and the right B
image must be overwritten synchronizing with SYNC.

14) Host Interface unit (OPTION for light version: With the EU-9102 connected)
Before making the following checks, make sure whether Image Processor 3 board is
displayed on maintenance menu - SYSTEM2.
" RT-3D (With optional SOP-ALPHA10-4 installed)
With RT-3D compatible probe (ASU-1010 and so on), When you select 3D probe, The
transducer must locate in the middle of 3D scanner.
In the RT-3D mode, three orthogonal plane and Real-time 3D image must display
normally. In this time, the 3D image must be free of extreme swing.
When you press Freeze switch, the transducer must stop in the middle of 3D scanner.
When you Freeze switch again, the transducer must start the scanning again.
After exiting from RT-3D mode, The B mode image must be displayed correctly.

" EFV (With optional SOP-ALPHA10-1 installed)

With EFV(Extended Field of View) compatible probe (UST-5411 and so on), EFV image
must be created normally after executing EFV function.
Zoom and Search function must be used on the EFV image.
After exiting from EFV mode, The B mode image must be displayed correctly.

" Multi-frame (Video Clip) acquisition (With optional SOP-ALPHA10-2 installed)

Acquire Method on the LCD touch panel must be available.
The video clip data must be displayed on the thumbnail screen. And this must be
playback from the Review screen.

" Multi-frame (Line) acquisition (With optional SOP-ALPHA10-2 installed)

The Line data must be displayed on the thumbnail screen. And this must be playback
from the Review screen.

8 - 10
 MN2-2008 Rev.1
SECTION 8 Performance Check

15) Independent probe connection unit (OPTION: With the EU-9110 connected)
Before making the following checks, check that the Independent probe connection unit is
installed and Independent probe is connected properly.
" PROBE
After selecting the PROBE 6 on the LCD touch panel, CW mode image must be
displayed normally.

" ACOUSTIC POWER

The image sensitivity must change by pressing the ACOUSTIC POWER switch in CW
Doppler mode and turning the rotary encoder.

16) Mechanical scanner connection unit (OPTION: With the EU-9109 connected)
Before making the following checks, check that the Mechanical scanner connection unit is
installed and Mechanical probe is connected properly.
" PROBE
After selecting the PROBE 5 on the LCD touch panel, B mode image must be
displayed normally.

" ACOUSTIC POWER

The image sensitivity must change by pressing the ACOUSTIC POWER switch in B
mode and turning the rotary encoder.

17) KI/A-SMA, CQ, WT unit (OPTION: With the EU-9100 connected)

Before making the following checks, make sure whether Image Processor 2 board is
displayed on maintenance menu - SYSTEM2.
" KI-SYNC
The Kinetic image that synchronized with R-wave of ECG must be displayed by
selecting KI-SYNC on the LCD touch panel.
A border line must be changed corresponding to threshold settings. And the Kinetic
image must be change corresponding to the ROI settings.
The searching Kinetic image must be displayed correctly after freeze.

" A-SMA
The area-changes histogram and line graph must be changed by updating the frames.
The searching image must be displayed correctly after freeze.

18) TEAC DVD-recorder DV-800

(OPTION: With PM-A10-H001 or PM-A10-H006 and PM-A10-009 is connected)
Before performing the following checks, check that the TEAC DVD-recorder DV-800 is
connected properly.
" External output
When you press the DVD recorder Rec switch set by the preset, the same image as
displayed on the monitor must be recorded.

" External input

From Review screen, the images that recorded on DVD-recorder must be displayed. The
image must be displayed correctly without synchronization failure, etc.

8 - 11
MN2-2008 Rev.1
SECTION 8 Performance Check

8-4-2 Image Quality Check

To ensure the quality of ultrasound images, check should be made by using a test piece or a
similar object.

1) Image Quality
" TOTAL IMAGE QUALITY
Condition: B mode, GAIN set to proper level, STC at center, CONTRAST 4
A proper image must be shown with the probe placed on the abdominal and cardiac
region. The liver counter and vessel wall image must be displayed smoothly. There is
not a noise, unevenness, an unnecessary writing on the image.
A proper Doppler image on the abdominal and cardiac region must be displayed
without sideband noise.
A proper Flow image on the abdominal and cardiac region must be displayed. By
switching Flow ON and OFF, The B/W image must not be changed extremely.
Check on all probes in use.

" COIN CHECK

Confirm that the focus points change smoothly from F1 (F16) to F16 (F1). If the
UST-5411 (Compound Array Electronic Linear probe) is connected, Perform the next
check as well as this coin check.
Condition: B mode, DEPTH/RANGE set to deepest level
Apply a thin film of jelly to the probe, put a thin metallic pin on the probe in right
angle to the probe length direction, and move the pin slowly on the surface.
Perform this once for focus F1 only, and also once for F16 only.

Confirm that US image does not have the echo gap(s), or does not appear on two or
more locations. Confirm that variable aperture is acting normally.
Confirm that on all probe connectors.

8 - 12
 MN2-2008 Rev.1
SECTION 8 Performance Check

" COIN CHECK (Only for UST-5411)

Confirm that the focus points change smoothly for elevation direction on UST-5411.
Apply a thin film of jelly to the probe, put a thin piece of metal on the center of the probe
surface (See “Fig. A” as below) and move this metal to end of the probe surface in
elevation direction (See “Fig. B” as below).
Perform this once for focus F1 ~ F3, and also once for F4 and more.

(Fig. A)

A piece of
metal

Probe surface
(Fig. B)

A piece of
metal

In case of “Fig. A” location, The Echo must be displayed with both focus F1 ~ F3 and F4
and more.
In case of “Fig. B” location, The Echo must be displayed with focus F4 and more only.
With focus F1~F3, The Echo must not be displayed.

8 - 13
MN2-2008 Rev.1
SECTION 8 Performance Check

2) Total Performance test

Condition: Probe UST-9130 or UST-52101
" Total Sensitivity
Use a test phantom, RMI MODEL 403GS or an equivalent, confirm the following items
on B mode.
$ A reflection echo of the seventh vertical Nylon pin can be shown.
$ Actual Echo of deeper than 11 cm can be seen.
Transducer

Measured point on B mode image

Test Phantom
RMI model 403GS

" Resolution
Use a test phantom, RMI MODEL 403GS or an equivalent, confirm the following items
on B mode.
$ Lateral resolution 3 mm or less
$ Axial resolution 2 mm or less

Transducer

Measured point on B mode image

Test Phantom
RMI model 403GS

8 - 14
 MN2-2008 Rev.1
SECTION 8 Performance Check

" Distance accuracy

Use a test phantom, RMI MODEL 403GS or an equivalent, confirm the following items
on B mode.
$ An error of distance accuracy must be less than +/- 5 %, when you measure the
distance between two of vertical pin targets by using the caliper. The vertical pins
have 2 cm spacing.
$ An error of distance accuracy must be less than +/- 5 %, when you measure the
distance between two of horizontal pin targets by using the caliper. The horizontal
pins have 3 cm spacing.
Transducer

Measured point on B mode image

Test Phantom
RMI model 403GS

" Doppler check

Use a Doppler Flow phantom, Doppler Flow System Gammex 1425A or an equivalent,
the equipment must be correctly set up.
When the probe is scanned on the phantom, The direction of the liquid flow of test
phantom must be correctly displayed.

" Color Doppler check

Use a Doppler Flow phantom, Doppler Flow System Gammex 1425A or an equivalent,
the equipment must be correctly set up.
When the probe is scanned on the phantom, The direction of the liquid flow of test
phantom must be correctly displayed.

8 - 15
MN2-2008 Rev.1
SECTION 8 Performance Check

8-4-3 Safety Check

When you do the Safety Check, refer to the Electrical Safety Manual, MN2-0205. In this section,
the descriptions are specific explanation for SSD-ALPHA10.

# IMPORTANT # The Safety Check is the test in order to check the electrical safety
perfomance of the equipment. Test method and standard is different
depend on the Classification for the degree of protection against surrges.
In case of SSD-ALPHA10, the Classification for the degree of protection
against surrges is in the categpry “Type BF Applied Part”.

8-4-3-1 Introduction
The safety check is performed base on IEC 60601-1 - General requirements for Safety.

8-4-3-2 Checking Protected Earth Cable for Continuity

Measuring between protective earth terminal of power cable and screw on the monitor cover
on SSD-ALPHA10.

Power cable for

200V~240V

Power cable for TV monitor

100V~120V

8-4-3-3 Measuring an Insulation Resistance

There is no supplemental information about this.

8 - 16
 MN2-2008 Rev.1
SECTION 8 Performance Check

8-4-3-4 Leakage current

# IMPORTANT # As SSD-ALPHA10 has hard disk drive inside, when you measur ethe
leakage current by using the leakage current tester that has automatic
measurement function such as “HIOKI 3156 LEAK CURRENT
HiTESTER”, do not use this automatic function. Because this function
automaticaly change the polarity of input voltage during the equipment
is running. It will be cause the damage on the hard disk drive.
Therefore when you measure the leakage current with above tester,
change the measurement condition after turning the equipment Off
manually.

" Earth Leakage Current

Earth leakage current must measure with STAND-BY condition.

" Enclosure Leakage Current (a) (Between the enclosure and the earth)
Enclosure leakage current (a) must measure between top cover of the unit and the earth.

" Enclosure Leakage Current (b) (Between the enclosures)

Enclosure leakage current (b) must measure between top cover of the unit and the
monitor.

" Patient Leakage Current I

There is no supplemental information about this.

" Patient Leakage Current III

There is no supplemental information about this.

" Patient Auxiliary Current (OPTION: with the PEU-ALPHA10* connected)

Patient auxiliary current must measure between ECG black lead and other ECG leads
that band red and green together.

8 - 17
MN2-2008 Rev.1
SECTION 8 Performance Check

SSD-ALPHA10 CHECK SHEET

Checked by
No. Check item Check item 1 2 Remarks
8-4-1 Functional Check
1) Panel Switch Panel LED
KEY BOARD
New Patient
End Patient
MODE
VEL RANGE
SELECT
USER1, USER2, USER3
Print(L), Print(R)
REC
2) Image display function DEPTH/RANGE
IMAGE DIRECTION(UL)/INVERT
IMAGE ROTATION
SCAN AREA
ZOOM
CURSOR/B.L.S.
FOCUS
BODY MARK
SEARCH
STORE/REVIEW
SWEEP SPEED
ECHO ERASE
SPECTRUM INVERT
3) Image adjustment function B-GAIN
STC
IMAGE FREQUENCY
FRAME CORRELATION
AGC
SMOOTHING(B)
CONTRAST
M/D-GAIN
ACOUSTIC POWER
SAMPLE VOLUME
DOP FILTER
FLOW-GAIN
FLOW FILTER
FRAME RATE ACCELERATOR
SMOOTHING(FLOW)

8 - 18
 MN2-2008 Rev.1
SECTION 8 Performance Check

SSD-ALPHA10 CHECK SHEET

Checked by
No. Check item Check item 1 2 Remarks
4) FUNCTION PROBE
PRESET
MENU
TISSUE HARMONIC ECHO
FREE ANGULAR M-MODE (OPTION)
ECHO TRACKING (OPTION)
Stress Echo (OPTION)
STCW Doppler
5) MEASUREMENT functions DISTANCE
6) Disk drive Floppy disk drive
MO disk drive
CD-R drive
USB flash memory (OPTION)
7) Network Worklist (OPTION)
Image storage (OPTION)
MPPS (OPTION)
Storage Commitment (OPTION)
SR (OPTION)
8) Photographing unit Analog thermal printer (OPTION)
Digital thermal printer (OPTION)
9) PC printer (OPTION)
10) VCR External input (OPTION)
FREEZE (OPTION)
Playback measurement (OPTION)
Audio (OPTION)
Remote control (OPTION)
11) DVD-recorder External input %OPTION&
FREEZE %OPTION&
Playback measurement %OPTION&
Audio %OPTION&
Remote control %OPTION&
12) Foot switch %OPTION&
13) Physiological signal display unit MODE %OPTION&
R-WAVE BEEP %OPTION&
ECG SYNC %OPTION&
14) Host Interface unit RT-3D %OPTION&
EFV %OPTION&
Multi-frame (Video Clip) acquisition %OPTION&
Multi-frame (Line) acquisition %OPTION&

8 - 19
MN2-2008 Rev.1
SECTION 8 Performance Check

SSD-ALPHA10 CHECK SHEET

Checked by
No. Check item Check item 1 2 Remarks
15) Independent probe connection unit PROBE %OPTION&
ACOUSTIC POWER %OPTION&
16) Mechanical probe connection unit PROBE %OPTION&
ACOUSTIC POWER %OPTION&
17) KI/A-SMA, CQ, WT unit KI-SYNC %OPTION&
A-SMA %OPTION&
18) TEAC DVD-recorder DV-800 External output %OPTION&
External input %OPTION&
8-4-2 Image quality check
1) Image quality Total image quality
Coin Check
Coin check (Only for UST-5411)
2) Total performance check Total sensitivity
Resolution
Distance accuracy
Doppler check
Color Doppler check
8-4-3 Safety check
1) Checking Protected Earth Cable for
Continuity
2) Measuring an Insulation Resistance
3) Earth leakage current Normal condition
Single fault condition
4) Enclosure leakage current (a) Normal condition
Single fault condition
5) Enclosure leakage current (b) Normal condition
Single fault condition
6) Patient leakage current I Normal condition DC
AC
Single fault condition DC
AC
7) Patient leakage current III
8) Patient auxiliary current Normal condition DC
AC
Single fault condition DC
AC

8 - 20
 SECTION 9

DISASSEMBLING PROCEDURE

SECTION 9
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

SSD-ALPHA10 Disassembling Procedure

1. Parts Identification

2. Layout of Individual Unit

3. Dismounting Flow chart

4. Covers

5. Operation Panel [L-KEY-84*] and surrounding parts

6. Power Supply unit [EU-6030*, EU-6031*] and JB-273*/-274*

7. Probe Selector, CPU, HDD and other daughter boards

8. PC unit [USM-28*]

9. Backplane, Power I/O board and 3.3V Power Supply unit

10. Storage-Drive unit [EU-9098*]

11. B/W Printer [UP-895* / UP-897* / P93* / UP-D897],

Color Printer [UP-21* / CP-900* / UP-D23MD / CP-900D],
VCR [SVO-9500 / HV-MD3000] and DVD-recorder

12. Viewing Monitor [IPC-1710*/IPF-1901]

13. Tilt Table/Monitor Arm

14. Panel Bottom Case, Rotation Arm, Level Arm and Panel Arm

15. Slide/Swivel Mechanism and Up/Down Mechanism

16. Caster Lock, Caster and Caster Cover

17. Physiological Signal display unit

CAUTION

> The system must be disassembled only by the qualified personnel.

> If you tighten the screws/bolts more than needing it during disassembling procedure, the
plastic covers could lead to make a crack.
> If the screws/bolts has a unloosing process, you must use it with same process.

9-1
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

1. Name of parts

LCD Monitor
IPF-1901 CRT Monitor
IPC-1710*

Cable Hanger
L-KI-630V

Operation Panel
L-KEY-84*

9-2
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

2. Location of units

Peripheral I/O PC unit

USM-28*

Physiological
Signal Display unit
PEU-ALPHA10*

AC Outlet
JB-273*/274*

Storage-Drive unit
EU-9098*

Sub-Power Supply unit

EU-6031*

Main-Power supply unit

EU-6030*

9-3
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

3. Flow chart
This procedure is described based on the flow chart below. Please proceed disassembling in
accordance with this chart. The number of each item corresponds to the number of descriptions.

* Only for EP4960

* EU-6030* ~ EU-6030E*

* EU-6030F ~

* EU-6030C* ~

9-4
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

* L-KEY-84C* ~

9-5
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

4. Removing of Covers

Cap, 2 4-1 Removing of Top cover

Top cover

1 Connected probe must be removed

beforehand.

2 Remove 2 caps and unfasten 2 screws

then take off the top cover.

BNK3×8Fe, Ni, 2

BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 1 4-2 Removing of Left side cover

2 Unfasten 1 screw then remove the left

side cover.

Left side cover

4-3 Removing of Right side cover

BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 1

2 Unfasten 1 screw then remove the right

side cover.

Right side cover

9-6
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 4 4-4 Removing of Front cover

2

2 Remove 2 caps and unfasten 4 screws

then take off the front cover.

Front cover
Cap, 2

4-5 Removing of Rear cover

BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 4

2 Unfasten 4 screws then remove the rear

cover.

Rear cover

9-7
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

4-6 Removing of Probe holders

2 Pull the lock-pin then remove the probe

holder as described in the figure.

Lock-pin

Probe holder

4-7 Removing of Probe holder rails

2 Remove 6 caps and unfasten 6 screws

(Three for each side) then take off both
right and left rails.

Left rail 2

Right rail

BNK4×10 Fe, Ni, 6

Cap, 6

9-8
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

4-8 Removing of Front base cover

2 Unfasten 4 screws then remove the front

base cover.

2
BNK5×20Fe, Ni, 4

Front base cover

4-9 Removing of Pedal cover (Front)

2 Unfasten 8 screws (Hexagonal cap) then

remove the pedal cover.

: M00101 ~ M00850
HB6×12SUS, 8
2 SW6, 8
Pedal cover (Front) : M00851 ~
HB6×12SUS, 6
SW6, 6

9-9
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

4-10 Removing of Rear base cover

2 Unfasten 4 screws (Two screws for each

left and right side) then remove the rear
base cover.

BNK5×20 Fe, Ni, 4

2 Rear base cover (Left)

Rear base cover (Right)

4-11 Removing of Pedal cover (Rear)

2 Unfasten 8 screws (Hexagonal cap) then

remove the pedal cover.

Pedal cover (Rear)

: M00101 ~ M00850
HB6×12SUS, 8
SW6, 8
: M00851 ~
HB6×12SUS, 6
SW6, 6

9 - 10
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

4-12 Removing of Front handle

HB6×25 SUS, 2

2 Unfasten 4 screws (Hexagonal cap) then

remove the front handle.

Front handle

4-13 Removing of Rear handle

Rear handle

2 Unfasten 2 screws (Hexagonal cap) then

remove the front handle.

HB6×30 SUS_EC, 2

9 - 11
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

(Blank page)

9 - 12
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

5. Removing of Operation panel [L-KEY-84*] and surrounding parts

5-1 Removing of Operation panel

2 1This work is for the following serial numbers.

S/N: M00101 ~ M00300

2 Unfasten 2 screws and open the

operation panel.

BNK4×10 Fe, Ni, 2

5-1 Removing of Operation panel

1This work is for the following serial numbers.

2 S/N: M00301 ~

2 Pass the screwdriver through the hole on

the probe holder rail. Then unfasten 2
screws and open the operation panel.

1 When the probe holder has blocked the

hole, shift or remove it.
BNK4×10 Fe, Ni, 2

9 - 13
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

3 P503 P501 P500 P502

3 Disconnect the all cables connected to the

operation panel.

# Connectors to unplug
[P500, P501, P502, P503]

4 Disconnect the cable connected to the

Audio amp.
4 P741

Flat tip screwdriver # Connector to unplug

[P741]

5 Lift the operation panel off.

3 P500

9 - 14
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

Cable Fastening 5-2 Removing of Brightness volume for LCD

CNK2.6×6 Bs, Ni, 2 plate(2)

2 Unfasten 3 screws and remove the cable

fastening plate. And then unplug the
connector.

# Connector to unplug
P22
2
[P22]

CNK2.6×8 Bs, Ni, 1

Brightness Volume for LCD 3

3 Unfasten 2 screws and remove the

brightness volume for LCD.

CNK3×6 Bs, Ni, 2

5-3 Removing of Audio volume

Audio
2
Volume

2 Unfasten 2 screws and remove the audio

volume.

CNK3×6 Bs, Ni, 2

9 - 15
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

5-4 Removing of MENU STC board

[EP513400**]
2 STC board knob, 8

2 Remove 8 STC knobs and 3 operation

panel knobs.

Operation Panel Knob, 3

4 Shield plate (1)

CNK3×6 Bs, Ni, 4 3 Unfasten 4 screws and remove the cable

shield plate (1).

4 Unfasten 4 screws and remove the Shield

plate (1).

Cable CNK3×8 Bs, Ni, 2

Shield plate (1)

S2.6×6 Bs, Ni, 2

9 - 16
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

5 CNK3x6 Bs, Ni, 2

Posts, 4 5 Unfasten 4 posts and 2 screws, then lift up

the MENU STC board.

6 Unplug the connector, then remove the

MENU STC board.

# Connector to unplug
[P3]
P3 6 MENU STC board
EP513400**

9 - 17
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

5-5 Removing of Rotary Encoder

P101
2 Unplug the connectors connected from the
encoder.

# Connectors to unplug
[J101, J102, J103]

P103 P102

3 Unfasten 1 nut and remove the encoder.

Nut, 1

Encoder

9 - 18
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

5-6 Removing of Shield plate (5)

CNK3x6 Bs, Ni, 4
S2.6x6 Bs, Ni, 4
2 Unfasten 4 screws and remove the cable
shield plate (1).

3 Unfasten 4 screws and remove the cable

shield plate (2).

Cable Shield plate (1)

Cable Shield plate (2)

Cable fastening
fixture (1) J21

4 Unfasten 3 screws and remove the cable

fastening plate (1) with cable.

# Connector to unplug
[J21]

S2.6x8, 1
S2.6x6, 2

9 - 19
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

Cable fastening
fixture (2)

5 Unfasten 3 screws and remove the cable

fastening fixture (2) with cable.

# Connector to unplug
[J22]

J22

S2.6x8, 1

S2.6x6, 2

CNK3x8, 10 S2.6x4, 2
6 Unfasten 16 screws and remove the
shield plate (5) while avoiding reset
switch.

CNK3x6, 4
Reset switch
Shield plate (5)

9 - 20
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

5-7 Removing of Panel control board

[EP513200**]
J3 2 J20

2 Unplug the connectors

# Connectors to unplug
[J3, J20]

3 Unfasten 4 screws and remove the plate.

CNK3x8 Bs, Ni, 4

3 Plate

4 4 Unfasten 7 screws and remove the Panel

Control Board.

CNK3x6, 7

Panel control board

EP513200**

9 - 21
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

5-8 removing of SW board [EP513300**]

2 Operation Panel Knob, 9

2 Remove 3 operation panel knobs.

3 3 Loosen 2 screws with hexagonal wrench,

Knob then remove the knob of the Jog dial unit.

Hexagonal wrench
M1.5

9 - 22
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

N3, SW, 4

4 Unfasten 6 screws and remove the shield

plate (2).

CNK3x6, 2 Shield plate (2)

N3, SW, 2 CNK3x6 Bs, Ni, 1

5 Unfasten 3 screws and remove the shield

plate (4).

Shield plate (4)

6 Unfasten 4 screws and 7 posts.

7 Unplug the connectors and remove the SW

6 board [EP513300**].
7 J23
# Connectors to unplug
CNK3x8, 4 J24
[J23, J24]
Post, 7
SW board
EP513300**

9 - 23
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

5-9 Removing of Key top

Key top (1)

2 Remove the key top (1) with using flat tip
screwdriver.

Flat tip screwdriver

3 Unfasten the tapping screw.

4 Remove the key top (2).

Tapping screw 3
3x8Bs, Ni

Key top (2)

9 - 24
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

5-10 Removing of track ball

2 Unplug the connector.

# Connector to unplug
[J100]

Track ball
3 Unfasten 4 posts and lift up the trackball.
Post, 4
2

J100

4 Disconnect the cable connected to the

trackball (track ball side), then remove the
track ball.

4
Track ball

9 - 25
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

5-11 Removing of JOG unit

Knob
1This work is for the L-KEY-84 or L-KEY-84B*
2

2 Loosen 2 screws with hexagonal wrench,

then remove the knob of the JOG dial unit.

Hexagonal wrench
H=1.5

3 Unfasten 4 screws and open the board.

CNK3x6, 4 JOG unit

JOG unit 4
4 Unplug the connector and remove the JOG
unit.

# Connector to unplug
[P200]

P200

9 - 26
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

5-11 Removing of JOG unit

Knob
1This work is for the L-KEY-84C* and after.
2

2 Loosen 2 screws with hexagonal wrench,

then remove the knob of the JOG dial unit.

Hexagonal wrench
H=1.5

3 Unfasten 4 screws and open the micro

speaker assy.

Micro
speaker assy

CNK3x6, 4 3

4 Unfasten 4 Posts and open the JOG unit.

JOG unit

5 Unplug the connector and remove the

4 micro speaker assy and the JOG unit.

# Connector to unplug
[P201, P200]

ASB-310, 4 5
P201 P200

9 - 27
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

5-12 Removing of Audio Amp

P740

2 Disconnect the all cables connected to

P743 the Audio amp.
2

# Connectors to unplug
P742
[P740,P742,P743]

3 Unfasten 2 screws and remove the

Audio Amp
Audio Amp.

3 BNK4×10 Fe, Ni, 2

BNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 4 5-13 Removing of Audio Amp board

2 [EP498300**]

Cover

2 Unfasten 4 screws and remove the cover.

9 - 28
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

BNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 4

3 Unfasten 4 screws and remove the right

cover of Audio Amp.

4 Unfasten 2 posts and remove the Left

cover of Audio Amp.

Post, 2

BNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 5 5 Unfasten 5 screws and remove the Audio

Amp board [EP498300**].
5

EP498300**

9 - 29
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

5-14 Removing of Panel shield plate

BNK3×6Fe, Ni, 4

2 Unfasten 4 screws and remove the Panel

shield plate.

Panel shield plate

5-15 Removing of Full-keyboard

Loosen screw
3
BNK3×12 Fe, Ni, 1

BNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 1 2

2 Unfasten 1 screw and remove the cable
clamp.

3 Unfasten 1 screw and loosen 1 screw.

4 Slide the push latch and remove the cable.

Cable clamp 4

Push latch

9 - 30
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

BNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 6

5 Unfasten 6 screws on the panel bottom

case.

5
Panel bottom case

6 Remove the full-keyboard unit to avoid the

mechanical parts.

Full-keyboard unit

9 - 31
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

Cover

7 Unfasten 4 screws and remove the cover.

7
BNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 4

8 Unfasten 4 screws and remove the

chassis.
Chassis

8
BNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 4

9 - 32
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

9 Unfasten 2 screws and remove the PC

board
9 CNK2×6 Bs, Ni, 2 PC board

; Unfasten 1 post.

; Post

< CN2
< Disconnect the all cables connected to the
PC board.

# Connectors to unplug
[CN1,CN2]

CN1

= Remove the Full-keyboard.

Full-keyboard

9 - 33
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

5-16 Removing of Speaker unit

4
BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 12
2 Unplug the connector [P742].
Speaker unit, 2

3 Unfasten 2 screws and remove 2 cable

clamps.

4 Unfasten 12 screws and remove 2 speaker

units.

3 2
P742
Cable clamp
BNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 2

5
BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 4
5 Unfasten 4 screws and remove the
Speaker.

Speaker

9 - 34
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

5-17 Removing of Lamp unit [L-LAMP-5*]

2 Sensor

2 Unplug 2 connectors.

# Connectors to unplug
[P743, Sensor]

2
P743

3 Unfasten 2 screws and remove the lamp

BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 2
unit.

3
Lamp unit
L-LAMP-5*

9 - 35
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

5-18 Removing of Micro speaker assy

Knob 1This work is for the L-KEY-84C* and after.

2
2 Loosen 2 screws with hexagonal wrench,
then remove the knob of the JOG dial unit.

Hexagonal wrench
H=1.5

3 Unfasten 4 screws and open the micro

3
speaker assy.

4 Unplug the connector and remove the

micro speaker assy.

P201 # Connector to unplug

4 [P201]

Micro
speaker assy

CNK3x6, 4

9 - 36
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

6. Removing of Power supply unit [EU-6030*, EU-6031*] and JB-273*/-274*

6-1 Removing of Main-Power supply unit

[EU-6030*]

1 Unplug the power cable before starting this

procedure.

2 Unfasten 2 screws and remove the

connector panel cover.

BNK4×10 Fe, Ni, 2

Connector panel cover

of the Power supply

S/N: M00101~M00950 (EU-6030~EU-6030E*)

3 Disconnect the all cables connected to

the connector panel.

# Connectors to unplug
[P802, P810, P811, P812, P814, P820,
3
P821, P822]
S/N: M00951~ (EU-6030F~)

9 - 37
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

<Left side> BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 1

4 Unfasten 1 screw and remove the left

cover of the power supply unit.

Left cover of
Power supply unit

BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 1

<Right side>

5 Unfasten 1 screw and remove the right

cover of the power supply unit.

5
Right cover of
Power supply unit

<Left side>
6 Unfasten screws and remove the fastening
fixture for power supplu unit.

M00101 ~ M00950
: S4×8 Fe, Ni, 4
: BNK4×8 Fe, Ni, 4
6
M00951 ~
Fastening fixture for : S4×8 Fe, Ni, 4
power supply unit : BNK4×8 Fe, Ni, 3

9 - 38
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

7
<Right side>

7 Unfasten screws.

: M00101 ~ M00950
BNK4×8 Fe, Ni, 4
: M00951 ~
BNK4×8 Fe, Ni, 3

8 Pull out the Main-power supply unit

[EU-6030*], then remove the unit with
holding it in order to prevent it falls down.

1 Be careful enough of treatment when you

remove it because the unit is heavy.

Main-power supply unit

EU-6030*

9 - 39
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

6-2 Removing of Top cover

Top cover (small)
of Main-power supply unit
3
2 Unfasten screws and remove the top cover
(large).

3 Unfasten 4 screws and remove the top

cover (small).

: M00101 ~ M00950
CNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 10
: M00951 ~
BNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 6
: M00101 ~ M00950
Top cover CNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 4
(large) M00951 ~
2 BNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 4

6-3 Removing of Motherboard [EP511000**]

2 Side plate (left)
of Main-power supply unit

1This work is for the EU-6030 and EU-6030B*.

2 Unfasten 10 screws and remove the side

plate (left).

S3×6 Fe, Ni, 9

BNK3×8Fe, Ni, 1

3 Side plate (right)

3 Unfasten 4 screws, and remove the

fastening plate for the power supply right
cover. Then unfasten 9 screws and remove
the side plate (right).

S3×6 Fe, Ni, 9 BNK4×8 Fe, Ni, 4

Fastening plate for

power supply right cover

9 - 40
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

4 Front cover 4 Unfasten 11 screws and remove the front

cover.

CNK4×8 Fe, Ni, 2 S3×6 Fe, Ni, 9

5 Disconnect the connector [P21] connected

to the PC Board [EP510400**].

PC Board P21
EP510400** 5

9 - 41
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

6 Earth cable
CNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 1 6 Unfasten 1 screw and disconnect the earth
cable connected to the PC board
[EP510600**].

7 Disconnect the all cables connected to the

motherboard [EP511000**].

# Connector to unplug
[P81, P82, P83]

7 P81
P82

P83
Motherboard
EP511000**

8 Unfasten 1 screw and remove the

motherboard [EP511000**].

CNK3×6 Fe, Ni 8

Motherboard
EP511000**

9 - 42
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

6-3 Removing of Motherboard [EP511000**]

2 Side plate (left)
of Main-power supply unit

1This work is for the EU-6030C* ~ EU-6030E*.

2 Unfasten 8 screws and remove the side

plate (left).

S3×6 Fe, Ni, 7

BNK3×8Fe, Ni, 1

3 Side plate (right)

3 Unfasten 4 screws, and remove the

fastening plate for the power supply right
cover. Then unfasten 9 screws and remove
the side plate (right).

S3×6 Fe, Ni, 9 BNK4×8 Fe, Ni, 4

Fastening plate for

power supply right cover

Line Filter
4 4 Unfasten 13 screws and remove the front
Fixing plate Front cover
cover.

1 Keep the fixing plate with connecting the

cables.

CNK4×8 Fe, Ni, 2 S3×6 Fe, Ni, 11

9 - 43
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

5 Disconnect the connector [P21] connected

to the PC Board [EP510400**].

PCB P21
EP510400** 5

Earth cable
6 6 Unfasten 1 screw and disconnect the earth
CNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 1
cable connected to the PC board
[EP510600**].

7 Disconnect the all cables connected to the

motherboard [EP511000**].

# Connector to unplug
[P81, P82, P83]

P81 P82
Motherboard P83
7 EP511000**

8 Unfasten 1 screw and remove the

motherboard [EP511000**].

CNK3×6 Fe, Ni

Motherboard 8
EP511000**

9 - 44
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

6-4 Removing of PC board [EP510500**]

1This work is for the EU-6030 ~ EU-6030E*.

2 Disconnect the all cables connected to the

PC board [EP510500**].

# Connectors to unplug
[P30A, P30B]

P30A

P30B 2

PC board
EP510500**

3 Unfasten 6 screws and remove the PC

board [EP510500**].

PC board
EP510500** CNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 6
3

9 - 45
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

6-5 Removing of PC board [EP510400**]

1This work is for the EU-6030 ~ EU-6030E*.

2 Unfasten 2 screws and 3 posts, then

remove the shield plate.

CNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 2

Shield plate
2
Post, 9mm, 3
SB5.5-9

3 Disconnect the connector [P20].

4 Unfasten 2 screws and remove the PC

board [EP510400**].
4

PC board
EP510400**
P20
CNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 2 3

9 - 46
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

6-6 Removing of PC board [EP510600**]

P43 2
P42 P40 1This work is for the EU-6030 ~ EU-6030E*.

2 Disconnect the all cables to connected to

the PC baord [EP510600**].

# Connectors to unplug
[P40, P42, P43]

PC board
EP510600**

3 Unfasten 7 screws and remove the PC

board [EP510600**].

PC board CNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 7

3
EP510600**

9 - 47
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

6-7 Removing of PC board [EP510700**]

1This work is for the EU-6030 ~ EU-6030E*.

2 Unfasten 7 posts and remove the shield

plate.

Shield plate
Post 8mm, 7
2 SB5.5-8

3 Disconnect the connector [P50].

4 Unfasten 7 posts and remove the PC

board [EP510700**].

P50
Post 60mm, 7
BSB-360
4

PC board
EP510700**

9 - 48
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

P62 2 6-8 Removing of PC board [EP510800**]

PC board
EP510800**
1This work is for the EU-6030 ~ EU-6030E*.

2 Disconnect the all cables connected to the

PC board [EP510800**].

# Connectors to unplug
[P62]

PC board 3 Unfasten 6 screws and remove the PC

EP510800**
board [EP510800**].

3 CNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 6

9 - 49
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

6-9 Removing of PC board [EP510900**]

1This work is for the EU-6030 ~ EU-6030E*.

2 Unfasten 6 posts and remove the shield

plate.

Shield plate Post 8mm, 6

2 SB5.5-8

3 Unfasten 6 posts and remove the PC

board [EP510900**].

PC board
EP510900**
3 Post 60mm, 6
BSB-360

9 - 50
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

6-4 Removing of PC board [EP537200**]

P43
P41 P42
P46
1This work is for the EU-6030F and after.

2 Disconnect the all cables connected to the

PC board [EP537200**].

# Connectors to unplug
[P40, P41, P42, P43, P46]

3 Unfasten 8 screws and remove the PC

board [EP537200**].

P40
EP537200**
2 3

CNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 8

4 Unfasten 8 posts and remove the shield

plate.

Shield plate Post 8mm, 8

4 SB5.5-8

9 - 51
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

6-5 Removing of PC board [EP537300**]

3
EP537300** CNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 3 1This work is for the EU-6030F and after.

2 Disconnect the connector [P50].

3 Unfasten 3 screws and 8 posts, then

remove the PC board [EP537300**].

P50 Post 60mm, 8

2 BSB-360

9 - 52
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

6-6 Removing of PC board [EP510500**]

Line Filter
Fixing plate
1This work is for the EU-6030F and after.

2 Unfasten 2 screws and side the Line Filter

fixing plate with connecting the cables.

2
S3×6 Fe, Ni, 2

EP510500** 3 Disconnect the all cables to connected to

4 the PC baord [EP510500**].

CNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 6

# Connectors to unplug
[P30A, P30B]

4 Unfasten 6 screws and remove the PC

board [EP510500**].

P30A P30B
3

9 - 53
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

6-7 Removing of PC board [EP510400**]

CNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 2

1This work is for the EU-6030F and after.

2 Unfasten 2 screws and 3 posts, then

remove the shield plate.

2 Post 9mm, 3 Shield plate

SB5.5-9

CNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 2 3 Disconnect the all cables connected to the

PC board [E P510400**].

# Connectors to unplug
[P20, P21]

4 Unfasten 2 screws and remove the PC

board [EP510400**].

P21 P20
3 EP510400**
4

9 - 54
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

6-10 Removing of Fan

2
PC board P42 of Main-power supply unit
EP510600**
In the case of Right fan

1This work is for the EU-6030 ~ EU-6030E*.

2 Disconnect the all cables connected to the

PC board [EP510600**].

# Connector to unplug
[P42]

3 Unfasten 7 screws and remove the fan

cover (right).

CNK4×8 Fe, Ni, 5

S3×6 Fe, Ni, 2
3

Fan cover (Right)

Fan 4
109P1212H4D01 4 Unfasten 4 screws and remove the fan.

S3×35 Fe, Ni, 4

9 - 55
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

6-10 Removing of Fan

P42
of Main-power supply unit
In the case of Right fan

1This work is for the EU-6030F and after.

2 Disconnect the all cables connected to the

PC board [EP537200**].

# Connector to unplug
[P42]

2 EP537200**

3 Unfasten 6 screws and remove the fan

cover (right).

CNK4×8 Fe, Ni, 4

S3×6 Fe, Ni, 2
Fan cover (Right)
3

Fan 4
109P1212H4D01 4 Unfasten 4 screws and remove the fan.

S3×35 Fe, Ni, 4

9 - 56
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

5 In the case of Left fan

PC board P43
EP510600**
1This work is for the EU-6030 ~ EU-6030E*.

5 Disconnect the all cables connected to the

PC board [EP510600**].

# Connectors to unplug
[P43]

6 Unfasten 7 screws and remove the Fan

cover (Left).

S3×6 Fe, Ni, 2

CNK4×8 Fe, Ni, 5
6 Fan cover (Left)

Fan 7
109P1212F4D01 7 Unfasten 4 screws and remove the Fan.

S3×35 Fe, Ni, 4

9 - 57
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

In the case of Left fan

P43

1This work is for the EU-6030F and after.

5 Disconnect the all cables connected to the

PC board [EP537200**].

# Connectors to unplug
[P43]

5 EP537200**

6 Unfasten 6 screws and remove the Fan

cover (Left).

CNK4×8 Fe, Ni, 4 S3×6 Fe, Ni, 2

6 Fan cover (Left)

Fan 7
109P1212F4D01 7 Unfasten 4 screws and remove the Fan.

S3×35 Fe, Ni, 4

9 - 58
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

<Left side> 6-11 Removing of Sub-Power Supply Unit

[EU-6031*]

2 Disconnect all cables connected to the

Power supply unit.

<Right side>
# Connectors to unplug
<Left side>
2 [P818, P819, P826, P827]

<Right side>
[P813, P823, P824, P825]
<Rear side>

<Rear side>
[P815]
2

BNK4×10 Fe, Ni, 4

3 Unfasten 4 screws and remove the

Sub-power supply unit [EU-6031*].

Sub-Power supply unit

EU-6031*

9 - 59
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

6-12 Removing of top cover of Sub-Power

Top cover supply unit

2 Unfasten 6 screws and remove the top

cover.

CNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 6

6-13 Removing of JB-273*/-274*

1This work is for the JB-273B / JB-274B.

2 Unfasten 2 screws.

2
BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 2

3 Unfasten 6 screws and remove the

JB-273*/-274*

JB-273*/-274*

CNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 6

9 - 60
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

6-13 Removing of JB-273*/-274*

1This work is for the JB-273C~ / JB-274C~.

2 Unfasten 4 screws.

BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 2

2
CNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 2

JB-273*/-274* 3 Unfasten 4 screws and remove the

3
JB-273*/-274*

CNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 4

9 - 61
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

6-14 Removing of PC board [EP525000**]

2

1This work is for the JB-273B / JB-274B.

BNK3×10 Fe, Ni, 4 Connectors

2 Unfasten 4 screws of connectors [J826,

J827] on the JB-273*/-274*.

JB-273*/-274*

4
Rear side of 3 Unplug the cables connected to the PC
PC board JB-273*/-274*
EP525000** board [EP525000**].

# Connectors to unplug
[P828, P830, P829A, P829B]

P829A 4 Unfasten 3 screws and remove the PC

3 P829B board [EP525000**].
P828 P830

CNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 3

9 - 62
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

6-14 Removing of PC board [EP525000**]

2

1This work is for the JB-273C~ / JB-274C~.

BNK3×10 Fe, Ni, 4 Connectors

2 Unfasten 4 screws of connectors [J826,

J827] on the JB-273*/-274*.

JB-273*/-274*

4
Rear side of 3 Unplug the cables connected to the PC
PC board JB-273*/-274*
EP525000** board [EP525000**].

# Connectors to unplug
[P828, P830, P829A, P829B]

P829A 4 Remove the PC board [EP525000**].

3 P829B
P828 P830

9 - 63
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

Cable fastening fixture 6-15 Removing of PC board [EP512700**]

1This work is for the EU-6031B.

2 Unfasten 4 screws of cable fastening

fixture.

CNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 4

Connector panel

3 Unfasten 6 screws on the connector panel.

CNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 6

3

Connector panel

4 Side both the connector panel and the

4 cable fastening fixture with cables

connected them.

Cable fastening
fixture

9 - 64
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

5 Unfasten 3 screws and remove the front

cover.

5
Front cover

CNK4×8 Fe, Ni, 3

6 Unfasten 3 screws and remove the rear

cover.

S4×8
Fe, Ni, 2

CNK4×8 Fe, Ni, 1

Rear cover
6

9 - 65
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

8
PC board
EP512700** 7 Disconnect the all cables connected to the
CNK3×6
Fe, Ni, 4 PC board [EP512700**]

# Connector to unplug
[P100, P101, P102]

8 Unfasten 4 screws and remove the PC

board [EP512700**].

P100
P101

P102 7

9 - 66
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

Cable fastening fixture 6-15 Removing of PC board [EP512700**]

1This work is for the EU-6031C and after.

2 Unfasten 2 screws of cable fastening

fixture.

CNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 2

Connector
panel

3 Unfasten 6 screws on the connector panel.

3 CNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 6

Connector
panel
4
4 Side both the connector panel and the
cable fastening fixture with cables
connected them.

Cable fastening fixture

9 - 67
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

5 Unfasten 3 screws and remove the front

cover.

5
Front cover

CNK4×8 Fe, Ni, 3

6 Unfasten 3 screws and remove the rear

cover.

CNK4×8 Fe, Ni, 3

Rear cover
6

9 - 68
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

8
PC board
EP512700** 7 Disconnect the all cables connected to the
CNK3×6
Fe, Ni, 4 PC board [EP512700**]

# Connector to unplug
[P100, P101, P102]

8 Unfasten 4 screws and remove the PC

board [EP512700**].

P100
P101

P102 7

9 - 69
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

CNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 4 6-16 Removing of the PC board

[EP511100**]
P100

2
2 Disconnect the all cables connected to the
PC Board [EP512700**].

# Connectors to unplug
[P100, P101, P102]

EP512700**

3 Unfasten 4 screws and remove the shield

P102 plate.
Shield plate
2
P101 3

4 Disconnect the all cables connected to the

PC Board [EP511100**].
PC board
EP511100**
# Connectors to unplug
5 [P91, P92, P93]

5 Remove 4 posts and remove the PC

board [EP511100**].

P91

P93 SB5.5-40, 4
4
P92 5

9 - 70
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

Cable fastening fixture 6-17 Removing the fan of Sub-power supply

unit

1This work is for the EU-6031B.

2 Unfasten 4 screws of the cable fastening

fixture.
2

CNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 4

Connector panel

3 Unfasten 6 screws on the connector panel.

3 CNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 6

Connector panel

4 Slide both the connector panel and the

cable fastening fixture with cables
connected them.

Cable fastening
fixture

9 - 71
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

5 Unfasten 3 screws and remove the front

cover.

5
Front cover

CNK4×8 Fe, Ni, 3

6 Unplug the connector [P90].

P90

7 Remove 4 screws, then remove the fan

and the finger guard.

Tapping screw 7
"5×10, ZMC4, 4

9 - 72
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

Cable fastening fixture 6-17 Removing the fan of Sub-power supply

unit

1This work is for the EU-6031C and after.

2 Unfasten 2 screws of the cable fastening

fixture.
2

CNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 2

Connector
panel

3 Unfasten 6 screws on the connector panel.

3 CNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 6

Connector
panel
4

4 Slide both the connector panel and the

cable fastening fixture with cables
connected them.

Cable fastening fixture

9 - 73
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

5 Unfasten 3 screws and remove the front

cover.

5
Front cover

CNK4×8 Fe, Ni, 3

6 Unplug the connector [P90].

P90

7 Remove 4 screws, then remove the fan

and the finger guard.

Tapping screw 7
"5×10, ZMC4, 4

9 - 74
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

6-18 Removing of Line filter

2 3
Cable clamp Shield plate 1This work is for the EU-6030C* and after.

2 Unfasten 1 screw and remove the cable

clamp.

3 Unfasten 3 screws and remove the shield

plate.

CNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 3

CNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 1

4
Rear cover 4 Unfasten 3 screws and pull the rear cover.

CNK4×8 Fe, Ni, 4

9 - 75
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

CNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 2

5 Unfasten 2 screws and 2 nuts, then
remove the shield plate.

SFLN3, 2

Shield plate
5

6 7
6 Unplug 4 connectors.
Connector, 4 Line filter

7 Unfasten 2 nuts and remove the line filter.

N4, 2
SW4, 2

9 - 76
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

7 Removing of Probe Selector, CPU and other daughter boards

Caps, 2 7-1 Removing of Top Shield Cover

BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 2

2 Remove 2 caps and unfasten 2 screws,

then remove the top cover.

Top cover

3 Unfasten 1 screw, and remove the right

BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 1
side cover.

Right side
cover

9 - 77
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

Fixture 4 BNK5×12 Fe, Ni, 2

4 Loosen 2 screws on the monitor arm, and
slide the fixture toward the right.

5 Squeeze the right lever under the

operation panel, and move the operation
panel to the highest position. After that,
return the lever to the original position.

1 Be sure to lock after move the operation

panel to highest position.

5
Lever for operation panel
moving (Up/Down)

9 - 78
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 10

6 Unfasten 10 screws and remove the top

shield cover.

Top shield cover

9 - 79
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

7-2 Removing of Jumper board

2 Lock pin, 5
DBF Jumper [EP497300** / EP497400**]
EP497400**

1This work is for the following serial numbers.

S/N: M00101 ~ M00300

2 Release 5 lock pins and remove both

jumper board [EP497300**, EP497400**]
at same time.

TD Jumper
EP497300**

7-2 Removing of Jumper board

[EP526200**]
Jumper board
EP526200**
1This work is for the following serial numbers.
S/N: M00301 ~ M01050

2 Release 3 lock pins and remove the jumper

board.

Lock Pin. 0 2

9 - 80
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

7-2 Removing of Jumper board

[EP532500**]
Jumper board
EP532500**
1This work is for the following serial numbers.
S/N: M01051 ~

2 Release 3 lock pins and remove the jumper

board.

2
Lock Pin. 0

7-3 Removing of Front stiffening plate

2 Unfasten 11 screws and remove the front

stiffening plate.

Front stiffening plate

BNK4×8 Fe, Ni, 11

9 - 81
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

7-4 Removing of Probe Selector board

2 [EP494800**]
Unfasten screws
BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 10

2 Unfasten 10 screws.

3 Loosen 5 screws.

1 When the independent probe connection

unit or the mechanical probe connection
unit are installed, remove these with the
reverse way of the installation procedures.

Loosen screws
3 BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 5

4
Probe Selector board
EP494800**
4 Remove the Probe slector board
[EP494800**] with card puller.

<How to use the card puller>

3 2

9 - 82
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

7-5 Removing of Daughter board

2 Remove the Daughter board with card

puller.

7-6 Removing of Peripheral I/O board

[EP491500**/EP533500**]

2 Loosen 3 screws and unfasten 10 screws,

then remove the peripheral I/O board with
the card puller.

Peripheral I/O
2 EP491500**/EP533500**
Loosen screws
BNK3x8 Fe, Ni, 3
Unfasten screws
BNK3x8 Fe, Ni, 10

9 - 83
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

7-7 Removing of CPU board [EP496000**]

2 Disconnect all cables connected to the

Video processor board. Then remove the
CPU board.

# Connectors to unplug
[P260]

P260
2
CPU
EP496000**

3 Disconnect all cables connected to the

CPU board while pulling out the CPU
board.

# Connectors to unplug
[P300, P301, P302, P303, P304]

P304 P302 3
P300 CPU
P303 EP496000**
P301

9 - 84
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

7-8 Removing of CPU I/O board

[EP514100**]

2 Unfasten 8 screws and remove the CPU

I/O board [EP514100**].

BNK3x8 Fe, Ni, 8

CPU I/O
EP514100**
2

9 - 85
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

7-9 Removing of Hard disk drive

1This work is for the following serial numbers.

S/N: M00101 ~ M00300

2 Disconnect all cables connected to the

Hard Disk Drive.

# Connectors to unplug
[PHDD, PHD2]

PHD2
2
PHD

BNK4x8 Fe, Ni, 2

3 3 Unfasten 2 screws and remove the hard

disk drive.

Hard disk drive

9 - 86
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

7-9 Removing of Hard disk drive

1This work is for the following serial numbers.

S/N: M00301 ~

2 Disconnect all cables connected to the

Hard Disk Drive.

# Connectors to unplug
[PHDD, PHD2]

PHDD PHD2
2

BNK4x8 Fe, Ni, 2

3 Unfasten 2 screws and remove the hard

disk drive.

3
HDD

9 - 87
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

7-10 Removing of CPU Cooler

1 This work is only for CPU board EP4960.

2 Unplug the connector of Fan for CPU

Cooler.

Connector 2

Clip lever

3 Open the right side of clip lever on the clip

frame.

3
Clip frame

9 - 88
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

4
4 Wait for a minute until right side of CPU
Make sure the space cooler will be risen up as shown in left
figure.

1 Please make sure to wait until one side of

CPU cooler will be risen up.
The CPU cooler is in close contact with
CPU. If you pull up both side of clip levers
and remove the CPU cooler strongly,
processor(CPU) will also comes off.

CPU Cooler

5 Pull up the left side of clip lever, and then

remove the CPU cooler with keeping the
CPU cooler is tilted.

CPU Cooler

9 - 88- 1
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

Grease
6 6 As there will be some old grease on both
CPU cooler and processor(CPU), Clean all
the remains of grease on the surface of
these with using cotton swap.

CPU Cooler CPU

9 - 88 - 2
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

Installing the CPU Cooler

Grease 2
CPU
1This work is only for CPU board EP4960.

2 Put a small amount of grease on the center

of processor(CPU) as shown in left figures.

3 Extend the area that applied grease to

15mm about 15 mm square by using a cotton

swab.

CPU 15mm 3

9 - 88- 3
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

4 Place CPU cooler on the processor(CPU)

and press the center of CPU cooler to
uniform the applied grease.

CPU Cooler

Clip lever

5 Close the both side of clip levers, and

verify that the clip levels are properly
engaged with the retention mechanism
hooks.

Retention
mechanism hook

9 - 88 - 4
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

7
Cable Cable tie

6 Connect the FAN cable to the connector.

7 Dress and secure meddle of FAN cable

with the cable tie as shown in left figure.

Connector
6

9 - 88- 5
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

(Blank page)

9 - 88 - 6
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

8. Removing of PC unit [USM-28*]

8-1 Removing of Duct

Loosen screws
BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 3

2 Loosen 3 screws and remove the duct.

Duct

9 - 89
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

8-2 Removing of USM-28

<Rear Side>

2 Loosen 5 screws and remove the cable

support.

BNK4×10 Fe, Ni, 2

BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 3

Cable support

4 1 Step 3 and 4 are only for the serial

BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 6 Shield plate, 2
number M00301 and after.

3 Remove 3 belts and remove the cable that

fixed to the shield plate.

4 Loosen 6 screws and remove 2 shield

plates.

Belt, 3
3

9 - 90
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

5 5 Unfasten a screw and disconnect all

cables from the connector panel.

# Connectors to unplug
[P261, P325, P326, P327, P328
P340, P341, P342, P343, P344, J345
cables connected to the recording device
P370, P373, P372, P371, P374]

BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 1

6 Unfasten 16 screws and remove the

fastening fixture (1).

BNK4×10 Fe, Ni, 13

BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 3 Fastening
fixture (1)
6

9 - 91
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

7 Unfasten 4 screws.

BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 2

7
BNK4×10 Fe, Ni, 2

8 Remove the PC unit [USM-28*].

8
PC unit
USM-28*

9 - 92
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

9. Removing of Backplane, Power I/O board and 3.3V power supply unit

9-1 Removing of Fan unit

CNK3x8 Fe, Ni, 2

1This work is for the following serial numbers.

S/N: M00101 ~ M01100, M01151 ~ M01184,
M01275 ~ M01300

2 Disconnect the connector.

# Connector to unplug
[P388]

2 P388 3
Fan unit
BNK3x10 Fe, Ni 3 Unfasten 13 screws and remove the fan
BNK3x8 Fe, Ni, 10 unit.

9-1 Removing of Fan unit

CNK3×10 Fe, Ni, 9 4 FAN, 3
1This work is for the following serial numbers.
S/N: M01101 ~ M01150, M01185 ~ M01274,
M01301 ~

2 Disconnect the connector.

# Connector to unplug
[P345]

3 Unfasten 3 screws and remove the cable

clamp.
P345
4 Unfasten 9 screws and remove 3 fans.
2 BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 3
3
Cable clamp, 3

9 - 93
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

9-2 Removing of Power I/O board and

2
3.3 V power supply unit

1This work is for the following serial numbers.

S/N: M00101 ~ M00950

2 Remove all PCB in the PC unit[USM-28*]

referring to section 7, then remove the PC
unit[USM-28*] referring to section 8-2.

1 Remove the daughter board, then remove

Power supply cable the power supply cable of HDD.

Bottom face 3

3 Turn the unit upside down.

BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 11 4 Loosen 11 screws and remove the bottom

Bottom plate
4 plate.

9 - 94
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

5 Unfasten 18 screws and remove the 3.3V

power supply unit.

3.3 V power supply unit

EP497100**
5
CNK3×6 Fe, Ni, 18

BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 2

6 Disconnect all cables connected to the
power I/O board [EP491200**].

# Connectors to unplug
[P380, P381, P382, P383, P385]

7 Unfasten 18 screws and remove the

Connectors
Power I/O board [EP491200**].

Power I/O 6
7
EP491200**
Screws
NK3×8 Fe, Ni, 16

9 - 95
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

9-2 Removing of Power I/O board and

2
3.3 V power supply unit

1This work is for the following serial numbers.

S/N: M00951 ~

2 Remove all PCB in the PC unit[USM-28*]

referring to section 7, then remove the PC
unit[USM-28*] referring to section 8-2.

1 Remove the daughter board, then remove

Power supply cable the power supply cable of HDD.

Bottom face 3

3 Turn the unit upside down.

BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 11 4 Loosen 11 screws and remove the bottom

Bottom plate
4 plate.

9 - 96
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

6 Power I/O P157 P156 5 Disconnect all cables connected to the

EP528100** Power I/O board [EP528100**].

# Connectors to unplug
[P385]

6 Unfasten 22 screws, and remove the

Power I/O while removing the connector
of the back side.

# Connectors to unplug
[P156, P157]

5 P385

Screws
NK3×8 Fe, Ni, 22

9 - 97
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

9-3 Removing of Backplane

1This work is for the following serial numbers.

S/N: M00101 ~ M00950

2 Unfasten 2 screws and remove the fan.

S3×8 Fe, Ni, 2

2
Fan

9 - 98
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

3 Unfasten 45 screws and remove the

backplane [EP491100**].

BNK4x10 Fe, Ni, 2

BNK3x8 Fe, Ni, 6

BNK3x8 Fe, Ni, 30

3
Backplane
EP491100**

BNK4x10 Fe, Ni, 2

BNK3x8 Fe, Ni, 5

9 - 99
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

9-3 Removing of Backplane

1This work is for the following serial numbers.

S/N: M00951 ~

2 Unfasten 2 screws and remove the fan.

S3×8 Fe, Ni, 2

2
Fan

9 - 100
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

3 Unfasten 45 screws and remove the

backplane [EP528000**].

BNK4x10 Fe, Ni, 2

BNK3x8 Fe, Ni, 6

BNK3x8 Fe, Ni, 30

3 Backplane
EP528000**

BNK4x10 Fe, Ni, 2

BNK3x8 Fe, Ni, 5

9 - 101
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

(Blank page)

9 - 102
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

10. Removing of Storage-Drive unit [EU-9098*]

10-1 Removing of Storage-Drive unit

<Right side> 2

2 Remove the cable connected to the right

side of the storage-drive unit.

# Connectors to unplug
[P720, P721, P722]

P722
P720
P721

3 P345
<Rear side>

3 Remove the cable connected to the

connector panel.

# Connector to unplug
[P345]

9 - 103
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

4 Storage drive unit

BNK3x6 Fe, Ni, 4

4 Unfasten 4 screws and remove the

storage drive unit.

9 - 104
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

10-2 Removing of Top cover of Storage-drive

unit
S2.6x6 Fe, Ni, 18

Top cover of 1This work is for the following serial numbers.

storage-drive unit
S/N: M00101 ~ M01530
2

2 Unfasten 18 screws and remove the top

cover of storage-drive unit.

10-2 Removing of Top cover of Storage-drive

S2.6x6 Fe, Ni, 19 unit

Top cover of
storage-drive unit 1This work is for the following serial numbers.

2 S/N: M01531 ~

2 Unfasten 19 screws and remove the top

cover of storage-drive unit.

9 - 105
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

10-3 Removing of CD-RW drive/DVD

multi-drive

CD-RW drive/DVD multi-drive

2 Unfasten 2 screws on the front. Slide

CD-RW drive or DVD multi-drive to the
front.

S2.6x6 Fe, Ni, 2

4 CD-RW drive/DVD multi-drive

3 Remove all cables connected to the drive.

# Connectors to unplug
[PCD1, PCD2]]

4 Remove the CD-RW drive or DVD

multi-drive.

PCD1 3 PCD2

9 - 106
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

4 BNK3x6 Fe, Ni, 2 2 10-4 Removing of MO drive

PMO1 PMO2
1This work is for the following serial numbers.
S/N: M00101 ~ M01530
3

2 Unfasten 2 screws.

3 Disconnect the connectors.

# Connecters to unplug
[PMO1, PMO2]

4 Remove the MO drive.

MO drive

10-4 Removing of USB port

1This work is for the following serial numbers.

S/N: M01531 ~

2 2 Unfasten 2 screws on the front.

BNK2.6x6 Fe, Ni, 2

Nylon clamp BNK3x6 Fe, Ni, 1 P750

4 3 Unfasten 1 screw and remove nylon

clamp.

3
4 Disconnect the connectors

# Connectors to unplug
[P750]

5 Remove the USB port.

5 USB port

9 - 107
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

Removing of USB cable

1This work is for the following serial numbers.

Blind plate
BNK2.6x6 Fe, Ni, 4 S/N: M01531 ~

2 Unfasten 4 screws and remove the USB

port plate and blind plate.

USB port plate

USB cable
3

3 Unfasten 6 screws and remove USB cable.

S2.6x6 Fe, Ni, 6

9 - 108
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

Instillation of USB cable

1This work is for the following serial numbers.

1
S/N: M01531 ~
2
3

2 Place each USB cable on metal plate as

shown in left figure.

Removing USB memory guard bar

1This work is for the following serial numbers.

Cover plate Nylon clamp S/N: M01531 ~
2

3
2 Unfasten 1 screw and remove nylon
clamp.

3 Unfasten 4 screws and remove cover

plate.

BNK3x6 Fe, Ni, 5

9 - 108 - 1
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

BNK3x6 Fe, Ni, 4

4 Unfasten 6 screws and remove USB

memory guard bar.

USB memory guard bar

4
CNK3x8 Fe, Ni, 2

9 - 108 - 2
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

10-5 Removing of Floppy Disk drive

2 Unfasten 4 screws.

S2.6x6 Fe, Ni, 2 3 Disconnect the connectors.

2
BNK3x6 Fe, Ni, 2
PFD1
# Connector to unplug
[PFD1]

4 Remove the Floppy Disk drive.

4 Floppy Disk drive

9 - 108 - 3
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

10-6 Removing of PC board[EP517800**]

1This work is for the following serial numbers.

4 Fixture
BNK3x6 Fe, Ni, 2 S/N: M00101 ~ M01530
2

2 Unfasten 2 screws.

3 Disconnect the connector.

# Connector to unplug
[P725]

3 P725

4 Remove the fixture.

PC board
6
EP517800**
BNK3x6 Fe, Ni, 4 Posts
BSB-318, 2 5 Disconnect the cables connected to the PC
board [EP517800**].

# Connectors to unplug
[P723, P724, P726]

6 Unfasten 4 screws and 4 posts, then

remove the PC board [EP517800**].

P723 P724
Posts
5 M5, 2
P726

9 - 108 - 4
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

10-6 Removing of PC board[EP550300**]

4 2 1This work is for the following serial numbers.

Fixture BNK3x6 Fe, Ni, 2 S/N: M01531 ~

2 Unfasten 2 screws.

3 Disconnect the connector.

# Connector to unplug
[P725]

P725
3
4 Remove the fixture.

PC board
EP550300** 6
5 Disconnect all cables connected to the PC
CNK3x6 Fe, Ni, 6 Posts board [EP550300**].
BSB-318, 2

# Connectors to unplug
[P723, P724, P726]

6 Unfasten 6 screws and 4 posts, then

remove the PC board [EP550300**].

5
Posts
M5, 2
P726 P723 P724

9 - 108 - 5
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

BNK2.6x6 Fe, Ni, 3 10-7 Removing of Foot Switch

Cover

2
2 Unfasten 3 screws and remove the cover.

3 Remove the fixing ring with special tool.

Special tool

PC board
EP473203**

4 Earth cable 4 Remove a screw and earth cable.

Disconnect the cable then remove the foot
swtich board [EP473203**].

9 - 108 - 6
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

11. Removing of B/W printer [UP-895* / UP-897* / P93* / UP-D897],

Color printer [UP-21* / CP-900* / UP-D23MD / CP-900D],
VCR [SVO-9500MD / HV-MD3000] and DVD-recorder

11-1 Removing of Recording device

2 Remove all the cables connected to the each recording device with wiring cart given below.
Analog Recorder SSD-ALPHA10
J349
IN PUT S VIDEO
Y/C OUT1 Connector Panel
J353
UP-21* REMOTE 2
COLOR PRINTER
J818
~ AC IN AC outlet [JB-273*/274*]
COLOR PRINTER
J349
S VIDEO IN
Y/C OUT1
Connector Panel
J353
CP-900* REMOTE
COLOR PRINTER
J818
AC LINE AC outlet [JB-273*/274*]
COLOR PRINTER
J347
VIDEO IN
B/W VIDEO OUT
Connector Panel
UP-895*/ J352
REMOTE
UP-897* B/W PRINTER
Sub Power Supply unit
~ AC IN J815
[EU-6031*]
J347
VIDEO IN
B/W VIDEO OUT
Connector Panel
J352
P93* REMOTE
B/W PRINTER
Sub Power Supply unit
AC LINE J815
[EU-6031*]
J350
VIDEO IN S VIDEO
Y/C OUT 2
J351
VIDEO OUT S VIDEO
Y/C IN
J354
CH-1/L
AUDIO L OUT
AUDIO IN
J355 Connector Panel
CH-2/R
AUDIO R OUT
SVO-9500 J356
CH-1/L
AUDIO L IN
AUDIO OUT
J357
CH-2/R
AUDIO R IN
J342
REMOTE
VCR CONTROL
J819
~ AC IN AC outlet [JB-273*/274*]
VCR
J350
VIDEO IN S VIDEO
Y/C OUT 2
J351
VIDEO OUT S VIDEO
Y/C IN
J354
CH-1/L
AUDIO L OUT
AUDIO IN
J355 Connector Panel
CH-2/R
AUDIO R OUT
HV-MD3000 J356
CH-1/L
AUDIO L IN
AUDIO OUT
J357
CH-2/R
AUDIO R IN
J342
REMOTE
VCR CONTROL
J819
AC LINE AC outlet [JB-273*/274*]
VCR

9 - 109
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

Digital Recorder SSD-ALPHA10

IN PUT USB J330(USB) Connector Panel
UP-D23MD J818
~ AC IN AC outlet [JB-273*/274*]
COLOR PRINTER
IN PUT USB J330(USB) Connector Panel
CP-900D J818
AC LINE AC outlet [JB-273*/274*]
COLOR PRINTER
USB J329(USB) Connector Panel
UP-D897* Sub Power Supply unit
~ AC IN J815
[EU-6031*]
J350
VIDEO IN Y/C
Y/C OUT 2
J351
VIDEO OUT Y/C
Y/C IN
J354
CH1
AUDIO L OUT
AUDIO IN
J355
CH2 Connector Panel
AUDIO R OUT
BD-X201M CH1
J356
AUDIO L IN
AUDIO OUT
J357
CH2
AUDIO R IN
J342
REMOTE VCR CONTROL
(Adapter is required)
J819
~AC IN AC outlet [JB-273*/274*]
VCR
J350
S-VIDEO IN
Y/C OUT 2
J351
S-VIDEO OUT
Y/C IN
J354
L
AUDIO L OUT
AUDIO IN
J355
R Connector Panel
AUDIO R OUT
DVO-1000MD L
J356
AUDIO L IN
AUDIO OUT
J357
R
AUDIO R IN
J342
REMOTE IN
VCR CONTROL
RS-232C
(Adapter is required)
J819
~AC IN AC outlet [JB-273*/274*]
VCR
- M00101~M00950
J360 Peripheral I/O2 board
DVI IN EP520800**
DVI OUT
(Option: PM-A10-H001)

DV-800 - M00951~
USB J331(USB) Peripheral I/O2 board
EP534600**
(Option: PM-A10-H006)
J826
POWER AC outlet [JB-273*/274*]
DVD

9 - 110
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

Removing of Color printer

UP-21* / UP-D23MD In the case of UP-21* / UP-D23MD
2

2 Unfasten 2 screws and remove the

recording device.

BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 2

In the case of CP-900* / CP-900D

CP-900* / CP-900D

2 2 Unfasten 2 screws and remove the

recording device.

BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 2

9 - 111
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

Removing of VCR / DVD-recorder

VCR / DVD-recorder

2
2 Unfasten 2 screws and remove the VCR /
DVD-recorder.

BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 2

9 - 112
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

11-2 Removing of B/W printer

UP-895*
In the case of UP-895*
2

2 Unfasten 2 screws.

3 Disconnect the cable from the printer and

remove the recording device.

BNK3×12 Fe, Ni, 2

In the case of P93* / UP-897* / UP-D897*

P93* / UP-897* / UP-D897*

2 Unfasten 3 screws and remove the

recording device.

BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 3

9 - 113
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

(Blank page)

9 - 114
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

12. Removing of Monitor [IPC-1710*] Applied to S/N: M00101 ~ M01590

12-1 Removing of Monitor

BNK3×10Fe, Ni, 1

1This work is for the following serial numbers.

S/N: M00101 ~ M01590

2 Unfasten a screw, then remove the cover

(small).

2 3 Unfasten 2 screws, then disconnect the

3
signal cable.
Signal cable
Cover (small)

Power cable
4 Disconnect the power cable.
4

Monitor

5 Unfasten 4 bolts, then remove the monitor.

1 Be careful enough of treatment when you

remove the monitor because it is heavy.

HB4x10 SUS_EC, 4

9 - 115
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

12-2 Removing of Monitor Rear cover

2 Unfasten 2 screws, then remove the rear

cover of monitor.

2
BNK3×10 Fe, Ni 2 Rear cover

9 - 116
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

12-3 Removing of Escutcheon

2 Escutcheon

2 Loosen 4 screws and remove the

escutcheon.

BNK4×10 Fe, Ni 4

3 Unfasten 3 screws and remove the panel

board.

Escutcheon
Panel board
3 P tight 3x8 Fe, ZMC4, 3
PW3, 3

9 - 117
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

Tight screws, 6 12-4 Removing of Stiffening plate and Shield

plate
Stiffening plate
2 2

2 Unfasten 6 screws and remove the

stiffening plate.

Tight screws, 4
3 Stiffening plate

3 Unfasten 4 screws and remove the

stiffening plate.

4 Unfasten 12 screws and remove the

shield case.

Shield case

Tight screws, 12

9 - 118
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

12-5 Removing of the panel board

2 Disconnect the connector.

# Connector to unplug
[W606]
2

W606

3 Unfasten a screw and remove the earth

clamp.

4 Disconnect the cable and remove the

3 knob board [4143000202].

Earth clamp

Knob board
4143000202

9 - 119
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

12-6 Removing of Backside plate

2 Disconnect 4 connectors.

# Connectors to unplug
[W303, GND-4, P901, J411]

W303 2

Tight screw, 1 3 Unfasten a screw and remove the earth

3
cable.

GND-4 P901 J411

Tight screws, 7 4
Backside plate

4 Unfasten 7 screws and remove the

backside plate.

9 - 120
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

12-7 Removing of Monitor Main board

2 Disconnect all connectors to connect the

PCB.

# Connectors to unplug
[W302, P903, P902, W301, W606, W101]

2
W302

P903 P902

W301 W606
W101

9 - 121
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

Fixture

3 Unfasten 4 screws.

4 Slide the fixture and remove it.

3 4

Tight screw, 4

9 - 122
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

12-8 Removing of Monitor fan

Fan cable

2 Open the ferrite core and remove it, then

remove the fan cable.

Ferrite Core

Fan shield

3 Unfasten 4 screws and remove the fan.

Tight screws, 4

9 - 123
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

12-9 Removing of Monitor fuse

2 Remove the fuse.

Fuse
5266400052

9 - 124
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

12. Removing of Monitor [IPF-1901] Applied to S/N: M01591 ~

12-1 Removing of LCD monitor [IPF-1901]

1This work is for the following serial numbers.

S/N: M01591 ~

2 Unfasten a screw, then remove the nylon

clamp that fixed power cable.

3 Disconnect the power cable.

Nylon clamp BNK4×8Fe,Ni ,1

4 Disconnect the signal cable.

4

3
Power cable Signal cable

9 - 124 - 1
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

5 Loosen screws
BNK4×10Fe,Ni , EC ,2

5 Loosen 2 screws on upper side.

6 Unfasten 2 screws on lower side, then

remove the monitor.
6 Unfasten screws
Monitor BNK4×10Fe,Ni, EC ,2

Operation check after installation of LCD

LCD Monitor monitor
±90°

±90°

2 Comfirm that five moving parts of the

2 ±70° monitor shown by the arrow arm are
adjustable smoothly.

+20°
60mm -10°
3 Confirm that the image is diplayed on
monitor correctly.

9 - 124 -2
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

12-2 Removing of cable fixing plate

2

2 Unfasten 2 screws and remove the cable

fixing plate.

BNK3×6 Fe-Ni 2

Cable fixing plate

12-3 Removing of LCD rear cover

2 Rear cover
1 Please do this work in dustless workspace.
Otherwise dust particles may get in
between the filter and LCD screen.

2 Unfasten 4 screws from rear side of LCD

monitor.

Tapping screw 4×15, 4

9 - 124 - 3
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

Hook, 8

3 Release 8 hooks, then make a space

between both covers.

1 To release the hooks, stick a flathead

screwdriver between both covers as shown
in the left picture.
3
Rear cover

4 Rear cover

4 Unplug the connector on PC board, then

remove the rear cover.

Connector

9 - 124 -4
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

LCD assembly 12-4 Removing of LCD front cover and

2
Optical filter

1 Please do this work in dustless workspace.

Otherwise dust particles may get in
between the filter and LCD screen.

2 Unfasten 6 screws, then remove the LCD

assembly.

1 When assembling, Match the projection of

Tapping screw 3×8, 4
front cover and the hole of LCD assembly
to fit it in.

Projection

Front cover
3

3 Remove the optical filter from the front

cover.

Optical filter

9 - 124 - 5
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

(Blank page)

9 - 124 -6
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

13. Removing of Tilt Table/Monitor Arm

13-1 Removing of Tilt table

Plastic Cable Clamp, 3
2
1This work is for the following serial numbers.
S/N: M00101 ~ M01590

2 Cut 3 plastic cable clamps. Then remove

these.

3 Unfasten 2 screws, then remove the

fastening fixture(1).
BNK4×10 Fe, Ni, 2

Fastening Fixture (1)

3

9 - 125
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

4 Unfasten 6 screws with rotating the tilt

table.

4
1 Be careful about rotating the tilt table too
much.

Tilt table HB6×30, 6

Tilt table

5 Remove the tilt table with putting the

5
cables through.

Tilt base
6 Remove the tilt base.

9 - 126
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

13 Removing of Monitor Arm

1This work is for the following serial numbers.

S/N: M01591 ~

Top Cover
CNK3×8 Fe,Ni, 1

Tilt Cover: Upper

Back Cover: Upper
CNK3×8 Fe,Ni, 2
BNK3×8 Fe,Ni, 4

Monitor Stopper Pin

BNK3×6 Fe,Ni, 1

Back Cover: Lower

BNK3×8 Fe,Ni, 2

Tilt Assembly
HB4×8 SUS-EC, 4 Arm Cover: Upper
BNK3×8 Fe,Ni, 1

Tilt Cover: Lower

Lock Knob

Arm Assembly
HB5×10 SUS-EC, 6

Arm Cover: Lower

BNK3×8 Fe,Ni, 1

Arm Base Cover

9 - 126 - 1
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

13-1 Removing of Tilt Assembly

HB4x6 SUS-EC, 4 2 Unfasten 4 screws from bottom, then

remove the tilt assembly.

Tilt Assembly

13-2 Removing of Back cover

2 Unfasten 2 screws on Tilt assembly, then

remove the back cover(Lower).

1 When assembling, Insert the back

cover(Lower) into the space on back
cover(Upper).

Back cover: Lower BNK3x8 Fe, Ni, 2

Back cover: Upper

9 - 126 - 2
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

Back cover: Upper

BNK3x8 Fe, Ni, 4

3 Unfasten 4 screws, and then remove the
Back cover(Upper).
3

13-3 Removing of Arm cover(Upper)

BNK3x8 Fe, Ni, 1 Arm Cover: Upper

2 Unfasten 1 screw, and then remove the

Arm cover(Upper).
2

9 - 126 - 3
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

13-4 Removing of Arm cover(Lower)

Arm Cover: Lower 2 2 Unfasten 1 screw, and then remove the

Arm cover(Lower).

BNK3x8 Fe, Ni, 1

13-5 Removing of Arm base cover

Flathead screwdriver

2 Stick a flathead screwdriver between the

2 Arm base cover and the Rotation arm, then

remove the Arm base cover.

Arm Base Cover Rotation Arm

9 - 126 - 4
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

13-6 Removing of Arm assembly

Earth clamp

2 Unfasten 2 screws from bottom of arm,

and then remove 2 earth clamps and 1
earth cable.
2
Earth cable

BNK4x8 Fe, Ni, 1

Earth clamp

BNK3x8 Fe, Ni, 1

BNK4x8 Fe, Ni, 1

4 Earth cable 3 Unfasten 1 screw from top of arm, and

3 then remove an earth cable.

4 Pull out the cables from Arm as shown by

arrow.

Cables

9 - 126 - 5
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

Cables
5 Unfasten 2 screws to remove a cable
holding plate. Then remove cables passing
though the opening of arm as shown in the
left figure.

Cable holding plate HB3x6 Fe, Ni, 2

6 6 Unfasten 6 screws, and then remove the

arm assembly.
Arm assembly

HB5x10 SUS-EC, 6

9 - 126 - 6
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

Installing of arm assembly

DVI cable

Earth cable

Power cable

View A

x2
Power cable

Earth cable

View B DVI cable

Operation check after installation of arm

LCD Monitor
±90° assembly

±90°

2 2 Comfirm that five moving parts of the

±70°
monitor shown by the arrow arm are
adjustable smoothly.

+20°
60mm -10°
3 Confirm that the image is diplayed on
monitor correctly.

9 - 126 - 7
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

(Blank page)

9 - 126 - 8
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

14. Removing of Panel Bottom Case/Rotation Arm/Level Arm/Panel Arm

Rear cover Loosen screws, 2 14-1 Removing of Panel bottom case

2 Unfasten 2 screws and loosen 2 screws.

Slide the rear cover to the front, and then
remove it.
2

BNK3×8, Fe, Ni, 2

3 Pull all cables out from the panel bottom

case.

Panel bottom case

HB5×12 SUS, 6
SW5, 6

4 Unfasten 6 bolts, then remove the panel

bottom case.

Panel Bottom case

9 - 127
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

14-2 Removing of Rotation Arm

Rotation Arm

2 Remove 4 caps.

3 Unfasten 6 bolts.

Cap, 4 2

HB6×30, 6 3

Cable clamp, 2 BNK4×10 Fe, Ni, 2

4 4 Lift up the rotation arm, and then remove 2

screws and 2 cable clamps.

5 Remove the rotation arm.

9 - 128
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

14-3 Removing of Level Arm

B/W printer fixation base 2 Unfasten 2 screws

2 BNK4×10 Fe, Ni, 2 3 Loosen a screw, and then remove the B/W

Loosen screw printer fixation base.

4 4 Unfasten 2 screws.
BNK3×8, Fe, Ni, 2

5 Loosen 2 screws, then remove the rear

cover with sliding it.

5 Rear cover

Loosen screw

9 - 129
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

7 BNK4×10, Fe, Ni, 2

Cable clamp, 2

6 Pull all cable back on the upper surface of

the level arm.

Level Arm
7 Unfasten 2 screws, then remove 2 cable
6
clamps.

8 9
8 Unfasten a screw, and then remove a
cable clamp.

9 Unfasten 2 blots and 2 screws, then

remove the slide/swivel mechanism.

Cable clamp

BNK4×10, Fe, Ni

Slide/Swivel mechanism

HB6×8, SW, PW, 2

BNK3×8, Fe, Ni, 2

9 - 130
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

Cover

;
; Pull up the cover to remove.

Level arm assembly

HB6×45 SUS, 2
SW6, 2
< Unfasten 6 bolts, then remove the level

< arm assembly.

HB6×25 SUS, 4
SW6, 4

9 - 131
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

Level arm

= Unfasten 6 bolts, then remove the level

arm.

HB6×20 SUS, 6
SW6, 6

14-4 Removing of Slide rail

Slide rail
2 Remove the slide rail.
2

9 - 132
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

14-5 Removing of Panel arm

2 Pull all cables out from panel arm.

3 Unfasten 6 screws, then remove the panel

arm.

HB6x12 SUS, 6
SW6, 6

9 - 133
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

(Blank page)

9 - 134
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

15 Removing of Slide/Swivel Mechanism and Up/Down Mechanism

15-1 Removing of lever for

BNK3×6, Fe, Ni, 2
Slide/Swivel mechanism

2
Cable Clamp, 2
2 Unfasten 2 screws and remove 2 cable
clamps.
BNK3×6, Fe, Ni, 2

3 Unfasten 2 screws, then remove the lever

for slide/swivel mechanism.
3 Lever for slide/swivel
mechanism

15-2 Removing of level for

Up/Down mechanism
BNK3×6, Fe, Ni
2
Clamp
2 Unfasten a screw and remove a clamp.
BNK3×12, Fe, Ni
3
Loosen screw
3 Unfasten a screw and loosen a screw.
4
Push latch

BNK3×6, Fe, Ni, 2 4 Slide the push latch, then remove the wire.

5
Lever for Up/Down 5 Unfasten 2 screws, then remove the lever
mechanism for Up/Down mechanism.

9 - 135
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

15-3 Removing of wire on each lever

Fastening
Fixture (1)
2

2 Unfasten 2 screws, then remove the

fastening fixture(1).

BNK3×6, Fe, Ni, 2

Loosen Nut

3 3 Loosen nut, then remove the wire.

Wire
AC-1025-YB-1000

9 - 136
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

15-4 Removing of wire for

Slide/Swivel mechanism

2 Unfasten 2 screws, then remove the

fastening fixture(1).

BNK3×6, Fe, Ni, 2

Fastening
Fixture (1)

3 Remove the fixture(1), then take out the

wire.

Wire

Fixture (1)

9 - 137
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

15-5 Removing of wire for

2 Up/Down mechanism
BNK3×8, Fe, Ni, 2

2 Unfasten 2 screws/

3 Loosen 2 screws, then remove the rear

cover.

3 Rear cover

Loosen screw

4 BNK3×6, Fe, Ni, 2

4 Unfasten 2 screws/

5 Slide the fastening fixture in the direction of

an arrow.

Fastening Fixture

9 - 138
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

7
Loosen Nut

6 Take out the wire from the fixture while

6 sliding the fixture in the direction of an
arrow.

7 Loosen a nut, then take out the wire.

6

Wire Fixture
AC-1025-YB-1000

9 - 139
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

(Blank page)

9 - 140
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

16. Removing of Caster lock, Caster and Caster cover

16-1 Removing of Caster lock (Front)

2 Release the lock of caster.

3 Unfasten 4 screws and remove the front

base cover.

3
BNK5×20Fe, Ni, 4
Front base cover

4 Remove 8 bolts and washers, and

remove the pedal cover.

: M00101 ~ M00850
HB6×12SUS, 8
4 Pedal Cover SW6, 8
(Front) : M00851 ~
HB6×12SUS, 6
SW6, 6

9 - 141
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

5 Loosen 4 screws on the boss.

5
1 Use the M4 wrench (Size 3mm)

Screw, 4
Boss 5
(M4 wrench)

6 Slide the boss to the outside.

"

HB5×12-EC SUS, 4

7 Unfasten 4 bolts and remove the caster

lock.

Caster lock

9 - 142
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

HB5×12-EC SUS, 4 Installation of caster lock

2 Pressing the caster lock to the unit, then

Install the caster lock with 4 bolts.

Caster lock

3
3 Align the boss with groove.

5
4 Lock the caster.
Boss Screw, 4 Groove
(M4 wrench)

5 Fasten 4 screws on the boss.

1 Use the M4 wrench (Size 3mm), and Make
sure all the way seated.

4
Caster lock
6 Make sure whether the caster lock and
Good example Bad example release operation is working correctly.

Screw Boss Screw

9 - 143
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

16-2 Removing of Caster lock (Rear)

2 Unfasten 8 screws and remove the pedal

cover.

2 : M00101 ~ M00850
HB6×12SUS, 8
SW6, 8
Pedal cover (Rear) : M00851 ~
HB6×12SUS, 6
SW6, 6

3 Loosen 4 screws on the boss.

1 Use the M4 wrench (Size 3mm)

4 Slide the boss to the outside.

3
Boss Screw, 4
(M4 wrench)

9 - 144
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

5 Unfasten screw and remove the clamp of

the power supply cable.

5
Power supply cable

BNK4×10 Fe, Ni

HB5×12-EC SUS, 4

6 Unfasten 4 bolts and remove the caster

lock.

Caster lock
(Rear)

9 - 145
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

16-3 Removing of caster (Front)

1 Make sure that the monitor is lowest

position before staring this procedure.
1 Do not remove 2 casters at the same time.

2 Release the lock of caster.

4

3 Loosen 4 screws on the boss.

1 Use the M4 wrench (Size 3mm)

3
Screw, 2
Boss (M4 wrench)
4 Slide the boss to the inside.

5 Jack up the front end of the equipment

about 15 mm.

5
Jack

9 - 146
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

HB8×15 SUS_EC
P3 type, 4
6 Unfasten 4 bolts.

Caster

7 Twist the caster off the front base.

9 - 147
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

Installation of caster

2 Make sure that both wheel-clock and

swivel-lock are released.

Swivel

Sticker

3 Turn the white sticker on the caster toward

the front of equipment, then temporarily fix
4 bolts.

HB8×15 SUS_EC
P3 type, 4
Caster (Temporarily fix)

5
4 Make sure that whether the boss slide
smoothly.

5 Align the boss with groove.

Screw, 2
Groove Boss (M4 wrench)

9 - 148
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

6 Fasten 4 bolts

7 Lower the jack after fix the caster.

HB8×15 SUS_EC
Caster P3 type, 4

8 Lock the caster.

Lock pedal

$ Fasten 2 screws on the boss.

1 Use the M4 wrench(Size 3mm), and make
sure all the way seated.

$ Screw, 2
(M4 wrench) % Make sure whether the caster lock and
release operation is working correctly.
Good example Bad example

Screw Boss Screw

9 - 149
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

16-4 Removing of caster (Rear)

1 Make sure that the monitor is lowest

4
position before starting this procedure.
1 Do not remove 2 casters at the same time.

2 Release the lock of caster.

3 Loosen 2 screws on the boss.

1 Use the M4 wrench (Size 3mm)

4 Slide the boss to the inside.

3 Screw, 2
Boss (M4 wrench)

5 Jack up the rear end of the equipment

about 15 mm.

5
Jack

6 Unfasten 4 bolts.

7 Twist the caster off the rear base.

HB8×15 SUS_EC Caster

P3 type, 4

9 - 150
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

16-5 Removing of Caster cover

Screwdriver

2 Insert the flat tip screwdriver betwenn the

caster and the caster cover, then make a
2
few space between caster and caster
cover.

Caster cover

3 Use force to remove the caster cover.

9 - 151
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

Installation of the Caster cover

2 Make sure the hook of each caster cover,

then install new caster cover.
2

9 - 152
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

n
17. Removing of Physiological Signal display unit

17-1 Removing of Physio. Unit

2 P600

2 Disconnect the connector.

# Connector to unplug
[P600]

BNK4×8 Fe, Ni, 3 BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 3

3 Unfasten 6 screws.

9 - 153
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

Physiological
signal display unit
4

4 Remove the physio unit.

9 - 154
 MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

BNK3×8 Fe, Ni, 13 17-2 Removing of Physio Amp [EP499700**]

2

2 Unfasten 13 screws and remove the plate.

Plate

Post, 2
3

3 Remove 5 screws and 2 posts, then

remove the fastening fixture.

Fastening
Fixture

S2.6×4 Fe, Ni, 5

9 - 155
MN2-2008, Rev.1
SECTION 9 Disassembling Procedure

P610
4

P611
4 Disconnect 3 connectors.

# Connectors to unplug
[P610, P611, P612]

5 Unfasten 3 screws, and remove the

Physio Amp [EP499700**].

P612

Physio Amp
EP499700**
S2.6×4 Fe, Ni, 3 5

9 - 156
SECTION 10

PARTS LIST

SECTION 10
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

10-1 Contents of Parts List

Parts are separately shown as each portion of equipment. When you find the part, firstly choose the
portion the part belonged, then open the page suggested with “INDEX”.

MONITOR
SEE INDEX 09

CABLE HANGER
SEE INDEX 03

MONITOR ARM
SEE INDEX 11

OPERATION PANEL
SEE INDEX 02
MAIN BODY
SEE INDEX 01

PHYSIOLOGICAL
USM-28* UNIT SIGNAL UNIT
SEE INDEX 06 SEE INDEX 08

STORAGE
DRIVE UNIT
SEE INDEX 07
AC OUTLET
SEE INDEX 05

POWER SUPPLY UNIT

SEE INDEX 04

10 - 1
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

10-2 Appliance of Parts List

This Parts List consists of the parts for technical service and maintenance.
Therefore, the parts model name (PARTS No.) is only valid to the technical support. When you order
the parts shown in the List, please apply to our technical support section.
Before you find the parts with this Parts List, please note that nobody can use any description in this
List for the other purpose.

10-3 Outline of Parts List

This Parts List shows many parts which are selected for the technical support and maintenance, and
made with the illustrations and Lists. These parts are selected with one of the basis as below,
$ For the surface of the equipment such as Cover and Connector

$ Machinery and things to be broken without difficulty

$ Operation panel including the Knob and Switch

$ Cables
Excluding one soldered to the other part directly

$ PCB
Please refer to the History which has been issued separately, because almost of the PCBs have
the revisions.

$ The things to be replaced frequently such as the variable resistor for the panel

$ Things to be needed additionally for the technical support.

10 - 2
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

10-4 Explanation of Parts List

This Parts List is divided by some blocks (INDEX), and each block consists of the illustration and list.

Index number linked to drawing Range of serial numbers to apply

Description of Index Model name of Index

INDEX UNIT S/N

MAIN BODY
01 USI-148
Serial
Item Code Part number Description Spec.
Number

1 A200876 SAP-1700-01-01 COVER:TOP

(2) A120026 PSC-116#7 INTERMEDIATE DECK COVER ~6200030

2 A120027 PSC-116#7B INTERMEDIATE DECK COVER 6200031~

3 A800041 L-CABLE-216 CABLE:J705-J607 For OPTION

Part description for each item

Range of serial numbers to apply

Part number for each item

Part Code (currently not used) Specification for each item

Item number linked to drawing

21 A120033 PSC-116#8 PROBE HOLDER

INDEX The number of the division for each Parts List (illustrations and Lists). This is indicated
in the illustration for whole equipment at the beginning.
UNIT The name of this block (or unit) indicated by INDEX.
If the same block or unit will be revised, it will be distinguished with this and next S/N
S/N If the same block or unit will be revised, it will be distinguished with UNIT, and this
shows the beginning of production change.
Item Relation numbers between illustration and List.
If the item number is described in brackets”()”, it may not be available. Instead, please
choose the substitution shown with same item number.
Code Code number applied one by one to each parts. However, at this time (Apr. ’08), it is not
acceptable to order.
Part number Parts number
Serial Number Applied serial number.
If it shows “xxxxx~ “, the part is available to serial number or after. On the other side,
“~xxxxx” means valid to the serial number and before. If the blank, If the blank, it is not
depended on the serial number.
Spec. The specification, some differences on shipment, and the other remarks are shown.

10 - 3
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

10-5 Attention

" Prohibition to use both previous and current format of Parts List.
In the current one, the model names of some parts are deferent from previous.
" Reference with “History” for the order of PCBs.
This Parts List does not show the PCB version (or not follow the each revision). Therefore, when
you order the PCBs, please see the “History” issued separately.
" Any other part which is not described in this parts list will not be provided.

10 - 4
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

10-6 Parts List

The parts List is shown from next page. It consists of “INDEX”. For the portion of equipment suggested
with “INDEX”, refer to the figure described in page 10-1.

10 - 5
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

01 MAIN BODY USI-153* S/N

22

21

47 11
Option: Ver.5~ 46
60
5 23

4
57
56 2
55 ×2

3
27 1

1+& 48, 49 C%DA@ 1+& 15 C%DA@

10 Excluding Item 48 and 49 11 Excluding Item 15 15

48 50

49

10 - 6
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

01 MAIN BODY USI-153* S/N

19

18
20

61

10 - 7
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

01 MAIN BODY USI-153* S/N

25

17
16

12
13
24
7

58
4
59 2
28
8 3
3 4

1+& 14 C%DA@
13 Excluding Item 14 26

14

10 - 8
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

01 MAIN BODY USI-153* S/N

53
52

54 PCB

29

10 - 9
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

01 MAIN BODY USI-153* S/N

30 ×2 33 ×2

32 31 ×2 34 ×2 35

36 39
38

37
41 43 40

44 ×7
42

45 ×6

10 - 10
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

INDEX DESCRIPTION UNIT S/N

01 MAIN BODY USI-153*

Item Code Part number Description Serial number Specification

1 A120323 SAP-ALPHA10-01-01
COVER : POWER SUP. FRONT M00101 ~ M00950
1 A120376 SAP-ALPHA10-01-01B
COVER : POWER SUP. FRONT M00951 ~
2 A120324 SAP-ALPHA10-01-02
COVER : POWER SUP. SIDE M00101 ~ M00950
2 A120377 SAP-ALPHA10-01-02B
COVER : POWER SUP. SIDE M00951 ~
3 A201693 L-KI-888
CASTER : FRONT RIGHT/REAR LEFT
4 A201694 L-KI-889
CASTER : FRONT LEFT/REAR RIGHT
5 A120325 SAP-ALPHA10-01-03
COVER : FRONT BASE M00101 ~ M00950
5 A120378 SAP-ALPHA10-01-03B
COVER : FRONT BASE M00951 ~
7 A120327 MP-CV-ALPHA10-1#26
COVER : REAR BASE (RIGHT) M00101 ~ M00950
7 A120379 MP-CV-ALPHA10-1B#26
COVER : REAR BASE (RIGHT) M00951 ~
8 A120328 MP-CV-ALPHA10-1#27
COVER : REAR BASE (LEFT) M00101 ~ M00950
8 A120380 MP-CV-ALPHA10-1B#27
COVER : REAR BASE (LEFT) M00951 ~
10 A120330 SAP-ALPHA10-01-04
COVER : FRONT M00101 ~ M00950
10 A120381 SAP-ALPHA10-01-04B
COVER : FRONT M00951 ~
11 A120331 SAP-ALPHA10-01-05
COVER : RIGHT M00101 ~ M00950
11 A120382 SAP-ALPHA10-01-05B
COVER : RIGHT M00951 ~
12 A120332 SAP-ALPHA10-01-06
COVER : LEFT M00101 ~ M00950
12 A120383 SAP-ALPHA10-01-06B
COVER : LEFT M00951 ~
13 A120333 SAP-ALPHA10-01-07
COVER : REAR
14 A120334 SAP-ALPHA10-01-08
COVER : CONNECTOR PANEL
15 A130005 SAP-ALPHA10-01-09
AIR FILTER (RIGHT COVER)
16 A110280 SAP-ALPHA10-01-10
REAR HANDLE
17 A110281 SAP-ALPHA10-01-11
COVER : TOP M00101 ~ M00950
17 A110307 SAP-ALPHA10-01-11B
COVER : TOP M00951 ~
18 A120335 PSC-138-2#14
COVER : ARM
19 A110282 SAP-ALPHA10-01-12
ROTATION ARM

10 - 11
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

INDEX DESCRIPTION UNIT S/N

01 MAIN BODY USI-153*

Item Code Part number Description Serial number Specification

20 A110283 SAP-ALPHA10-01-13
PANEL BOTTOM CASE
21 A110284 PSC-138-2#35
FRONT HANDLE
22 A110285 PSC-138-2#33
COVER : TILT
23 A110286 SAP-ALPHA10-01-14
HANGER STAND
24 A110287 SAP-ALPHA10-01-15
B/W PRINTER FIXING PLATE M00101 ~ M00850
24 A110308 SAP-ALPHA10-01-15B
B/W PRINTER FIXING PLATE M00851 ~
25 A110288 SAP-ALPHA10-01-16
COVER : B/W PRINTER For SSZ-309/UP-895*
25 A110295 SAP-ALPHA10-01-25 For SSZ-310/D310/P93*/
COVER : B/W PRINTER
UP-897*/UP-D897*
26 A120336 L-KI-888/889-cover
CASTER COVER
27 A110271 L-KI-874
CASTER LOCK : FRONT
28 A110289 L-KI-875
CASTER LOCK : REAR
29 A616053 L-LAMP-5
LAMP UNIT M00101 ~ M00950
29 A616058 L-LAMP-5B
LAMP UNIT M00951 ~
30 A120337 MP-PH-ALPHA10-1
HOOK-TYPE HOLDER(right) UNIT
31 A120338 MP-PH1
HOOK-TYPE HOLDER(right)
32 A120339 MP-PH-ADAPTER-1
HOOK-TYPE HOLDER(right) ADAPTER
33 A120340 MP-PH-ALPHA10-2
HOOK-TYPE HOLDER(left) UNIT
34 A120341 MP-PH2
HOOK-TYPE HOLDER(left)
35 A120342 MP-PH-ADAPTER-2
HOOK-TYPE HOLDER(left) ADAPTER
36 A120343 MP-PH-ALPHA10-3
JELLY HOLDER UNIT
37 A120344 MP-PH3
JELLY HOLDER
38 A120345 MP-PH-ADAPTER-4
JELLY CUP
39 A120346 MP-PH-ALPHA10-4
THROW-TYPE HOLDER UNIT
40 A120347 MP-PH4
THROW-TYPE HOLDER
41 A120348 MP-PH-ALPHA10-5
ENDO-CAVITARY PROBE HOLDER UNIT OPTION
42 A120344 MP-PH3
JELLY HOLDER OPTION
43 A120349 MP-PH-ADAPTER-3
ENDO-CAVITARY PROBE HOLDER ADAPTER OPTION

10 - 12
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

INDEX DESCRIPTION UNIT S/N

01 MAIN BODY USI-153*

Item Code Part number Description Serial number Specification

44 A110290 MP-PH1-FX1
HOLDER FXTURE1
45 A110291 MP-PH1-FX2
HOLDER FXTURE2
46 A110292 SAP-ALPHA10-01-46
HOLDER RAIL (right)
47 A110293 SAP-ALPHA10-01-47
HOLDER RAIL (left)
48 A100486 SAP-ALPHA10-01-48
BLIND PLATE (left)
49 A100487 SAP-ALPHA10-01-49
BLIND PLATE (right)
50 A110294 SAP-ALPHA10-01-50
CABLE HOOK M00101 ~ M00950
50 A110310 MP-CV-ALPHA10-1B#22
CABLE HOOK M00951 ~
52 A802829 CO-PSC-138-U-05C0-02C5
CABLE710
53 A100488 SAP-ALPHA10-01-53
AUDIO CASE
54 A802830 EP498300**
PCB : AUDIO AMP
55 A130006 SAP-ALPHA10-01-55
AIR FILTER (POWER SUPPLY)
56 A120326 MP-CV-ALPHA10-1#17
COVER : FRONT PEDAL (RIGHT) M00101 ~ M00850
56 A120385 MP-CV-ALPHA10-1#41
COVER : FRONT PEDAL (RIGHT) M00851 ~
57 A120326 MP-CV-ALPHA10-1#17
COVER : FRONT PEDAL (LEFT) M00101 ~ M00850
57 A120386 MP-CV-ALPHA10-1#40
COVER : FRONT PEDAL (LEFT) M00851 ~
58 A120329 MP-CV-ALPHA10-1#18
COVER : REAR PEDAL (RIGHT) M00101 ~ M00850
58 A120387 MP-CV-ALPHA10-1#42
COVER : REAR PEDAL (RIGHT) M00851 ~
59 A120329 MP-CV-ALPHA10-1#18
COVER : REAR PEDAL (LEFT) M00101 ~ M00850
59 A120388 MP-CV-ALPHA10-1#43
COVER : REAR PEDAL (LEFT) M00851 ~
60 A010013 JB-284
USB EXTENSION BOX OPTION
61 A110314 SAP-ALPHA10-01-61
PANEL SWIVEL UNIT M00101 ~ M00950
61 A110315 SAP-ALPHA10-01-61B
PANEL SWIVEL UNIT M00951 ~

10 - 13
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

02 OPERATION PANEL L-KEY-84* S/N

Label Label (Ver.4~), *$BE

66 70

Operation Panel
2 1Wab?d`fC%DA@
<[Yf"->
Note) Excluding Knobs and labels
3 ×4 4 ×8 <Side View>

28 29

5 68 67
×2 22 14 Label Label

25
27
PCB
23
24

26
×2

10 - 14
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

02 OPERATION PANEL L-KEY-84* S/N

CTRL PCB
9 ×8 SW PCB

8 STC PCB

19 ×3

10 - 15
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

02 OPERATION PANEL L-KEY-84* S/N

21

CTRL PCB

10

10 - 16
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

02 OPERATION PANEL L-KEY-84~L-KEY-84B* S/N

19

13

12
JOG ASSY 11 SW PCB
1LkXV_lItem 13mC%DA@
Note) Excluding Item 13(Key top).

15 ×2
20
×2

10 - 17
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

02 OPERATION PANEL L-KEY-84C*~ S/N

19

13

12
JOG ASSY
1LkXV_lItem 13mC%DA@
Note) Excluding Item 13(Key top). 11 SW PCB

69

15 ×2
20
×2

10 - 18
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

02 OPERATION PANEL L-KEY-84* S/N

30 31 KEY TOP 32 ~ 41 KEY TOP 42 ~ 50 KEY TOP 51 ~ 55 KEY TOP

KEY TOP Holder KEY TOP Holder
63 63
LED LED
18 18

Switch Switch
16 16

56 KEY TOP
57 ~ 62 KEY TOP
64 KEY TOP Holder
65 KEY TOP Holder
Switch 18 LED
18 LED
16 16 Switch
17 Switch

32 33 34

31
35 45 46 40

44 47
30 41
43 48

57 53 54
42 62 49
36
58 61 55

52 38 59 60
39

51
37
56 50

10 - 19
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

INDEX DESCRIPTION UNIT S/N

02 OPERATION PANEL L-KEY-84*

Item Code Part number Description Serial number Specification

2 A201695 L-KEY-84* MAIN PANEL

OPERATION PANEL
3 A510057 SP-4128 For
KNOB(S) M00101 ~ M00500
L-KEY-84 ~ L-KEY-84D
3 A510067 MP-CV-ALPHA10-1#36
KNOB(S) M00501 ~ For L-KEY-84E~
4 A510058 SP-4129 For
STC KNOB M00101 ~ M00500
L-KEY-84 ~ L-KEY-84D
4 A510068 MP-CV-ALPHA10-1#35
STC KNOB M00501 ~ For L-KEY-84E~
5 A510064 SP-4131 For
ROTARY ENCODER KNOB M00101 ~ M00500
L-KEY-84 ~ L-KEY-84D
5 A510069 MP-CV-ALPHA10-1#34
ROTARY ENCODER KNOB M00501 ~ For L-KEY-84E~
8 A803033 EP513400CC For
MENU STC PCB
L-KEY-84C ~ L-KEY-84G
8 A803110 EP513400DD
MENU STC PCB For L-KEY-84H~
9 A623073 EWAPFEX15B53
RESISTER VARIABLE:SLIDE
10 A803034 EP513200CD-C For
PANEL CONTROL PCB
L-KEY-84 ~ L-KEY-84B
10 A803035 EP513200EF For
PANEL CONTROL PCB
L-KEY-84C ~ L-KEY-84G
10 A803111 EP513200GH
PANEL CONTROL PCB For L-KEY-84H~
11 A803036 EP513300CD For
SW PCB
L-KEY-84 ~ L-KEY-84B
11 A803037 EP513300EE For
SW PCB
L-KEY-84C ~ L-KEY-84F
11 A803112 EP513300EF
SW PCB For L-KEY-84G~
12 A201696 JOG ASSY For
B GAIN/FREEZE SW ASSY M00101 ~ M00500
L-KEY-84 ~ L-KEY-84D
12 A201794 L-KEY-84E-JOG ASSY
B GAIN/FREEZE SW ASSY(L-KEY-84E) M00501 ~ For L-KEY-84E~
13 A201697 KEY TOP : FREEZE
KEY TOP : MARK (FREEZE)
14 A201698 SAP-ALPHA10-02-14 For
JOG SHUTTLE (B GAIN KNOB) M00101 ~ M00500
L-KEY-84 ~ L-KEY-84D
14 A201795 SAP-ALPHA10-02-14B
JOG SHUTTLE (B GAIN KNOB) M00501 ~ For L-KEY-84E~
15 A611291 MA32701 For
PADDLE SWITCH M00101 ~ M00500
L-KEY-84 ~ L-KEY-84D
15 A611446 MA40751
PADDLE SWITCH M00501 ~ For L-KEY-84E~
16 A611289 SHM-32S SW00~05,06-01,06-02,07,10~17,26,27,
30~35
17 A611292 B3W-4055
SW20~25
18 A616054 BPKT037L
LED

10 - 20
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

INDEX DESCRIPTION UNIT S/N

02 OPERATION PANEL L-KEY-84*

Item Code Part number Description Serial number Specification

19 A618029 L-RE-6D ASSY

ROTARY ENCODER (with click)
20 A618027 EC16B24204
ROTARY ENCODER
21 A618033 L-TB-12C
TRACK BALL
22 A201699 L-KEY-84* FULL-KEY
FULL KEY BOARD ASSY
23 A201700 HMB634-J01
FULL KEY BOARD
24 A802834 YU501K-0017G002
FULL KEY BOARD PCB
25 A802835 YS420K-002P001
FULL KEY BOARD CABLE
26 A880001 KC-284-20
SLIDE RAIL
27 B619000 C-94
MAGNET CATCH
28 A624014 SAP-ALPHA10-02-28
LCD CABLE ASSY
29 A624015 SAP-ALPHA10-02-29
AUDIO VOLUME ASSY
30 A201701 KEY-A-84T :
KEY TOP : END PATIENT
MARK(Person)
31 A201702 KEY-A-84T :
KEY TOP : ACOUSTIC POWER
ACOUSTIC POWER
32 A201703 KEY-B-84T : MENU
KEY TOP : MENU
33 A201704 KEY-B-84T : PRESET
KEY TOP : PRESET
34 A201705 KEY-B-84T :
KEY TOP : PROBE
MARK(PROBE)
35 A201706 KEY-B-84T :
KEY TOP : NEW PATIENT
NEW PATIENT
36 A201707 KEY-B-84T : CANCEL
KEY TOP : CANCEL
37 A201708 KEY-B-84T : MARK(Scale)
KEY TOP : MEASUREMENT
38 A201709 KEY-B-84T : +
KEY TOP : +
39 A201710 KEY-B-84T : SELECT
KEY TOP : SELECT
40 A201711 KEY-B-84T : 3D
KEY TOP : 3D
41 A201712 KEY-B-84T : REVIEW
KEY TOP : REVIEW
42 A201713 KEY-C-84T : CW
KEY TOP : CW
43 A201714 KEY-C-84T : PW
KEY TOP : PW
44 A201715 KEY-C-84T : FLOW
KEY TOP : FLOW
45 A201716 KEY-C-84T :
KEY TOP : POWER FLOW
POWER FLOW

10 - 21
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

INDEX DESCRIPTION UNIT S/N

02 OPERATION PANEL L-KEY-84*

Item Code Part number Description Serial number Specification

46 A201717 KEY-C-84T : USER 2

KEY TOP : USER 2
47 A201718 KEY-C-84T : M
KEY TOP : M
48 A201719 KEY-C-84T : B/B
KEY TOP : B/B
49 A201720 KEY-C-84T : B
KEY TOP : B
50 A201721 KEY-C-84T : MARKlpRm
KEY TOP : SEND/R
51 A201722 KEY-D-84T :
KEY TOP : PRINT1
MARKlPRINT: leftm
52 A201723 KEY-D-84T : USER 3
KEY TOP : USER 3
53 A201724 KEY-D-84T : STORE
KEY TOP : STORE
54 A201725 KEY-D-84T : REC
KEY TOP : REC
55 A201726 KEY-D-84T :
KEY TOP : PRINT2
MARKlPRINT: rightm
56 A201727 KEY-E-84T : ENTER L
KEY TOP : ENTER/L
57 A201728 KEY-F-84T : SCAN AREA
KEY TOP : SCAN AREA
58 A201729 KEY-F-84T :
KEY TOP : CURSOR B.L.S
CURSOR B.L.S
59 A201730 KEY-F-84T : SEARCH
KEY TOP : SEARCH
60 A201731 KEY-F-84T : USER 1
KEY TOP : USER 1
61 A201732 KEY-F-84T : FOCUS
KEY TOP : FOCUS
62 A201733 KEY-F-84T : ZOOM
KEY TOP : ZOOM
63 A201734 KEY-B-84H
KEY TOP HOLDER
64 A201735 KEY-E-84H
KEY TOP HOLDER
65 A201736 KEY-F-84H
KEY TOP HOLDER
66 A600291 PSC-138-2#91
TITEL LABEL
67 A600020 P-4246-UL
LABEL(1)
68 A600213 P-4232UB-UL
LABEL(2)
69 A201796 L-KEY-84 speaker assy
MICRO SPEAKER ASSY For L-KEY-84C~
70 A600312 P-32-SSD-ALPHA10-27
Premier LABEL For Ver.4~, *$BE

10 - 22
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

(Blank page)

10 - 23
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

03 CABLE HANGER L-KI-630V S/N

10 - 24
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

INDEX DESCRIPTION UNIT S/N

03 CABLE HANGER L-KI-630V

Item Code Part number Description Serial number Specification

1 A150181 L-Ki-630V
CABLE HANGER

10 - 25
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

04 POWER SUPPLY UNIT EU-6030B~EU-6030E S/N

6 7
1
4

3 2

10 12 13

11

10 - 26
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

04 POWER SUPPLY UNIT EU-6030F~ S/N

3 2

10 12 13

11

10 - 27
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

INDEX DESCRIPTION UNIT S/N

04 POWER SUPPLY UNIT EU-6030*

Item Code Part number Description Serial number Specification

1 A030107 EU-6030*
MAIN POWER SUPPLY UNIT
2 A802836 EP510400**
AC LINE FILTER UNIT
3 A802837 EP510500**
AC/DC CONVERTER UNIT
4 A802838 EP510600** For
DC/DC CONVERTER UNIT(1) M00101 ~ M00950
EU-6030B~EU-6030E
4 A803038 EP537200**
DC/DC CONVERTER UNIT M00951 ~ For EU-6030F~
5 A802839 EP510700** For
DC/DC CONVERTER UNIT(2) M00101 ~ M00950
EU-6030B~EU-6030E
6 A802840 EP510800** For
LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT(1) M00101 ~ M00950
EU-6030B~EU-6030E
6 A803039 EP537300**
LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT M00951 ~ For EU-6030F~
7 A802841 EP510900** For
LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT(2) M00101 ~ M00950
EU-6030B~EU-6030E
8 A802842 EP511000** For
MOTHERBOARD M00101 ~ M00950
EU-6030B~EU-6030E
9 A625057 109P1212H4D01
FAN1
10 A625056 109P1212F4D01
FAN2
11 A621027 SUP-P15H-R-0
LINE FILTER1
12 A030100 CP-116
POWER SUPPLY CABLE For 100-120V
13 A030101 CP-117
POWER SUPPLY CABLE For 200-240V
14 A802843 CO-EU6030-A
CABLE041
15 A802844 CO-EU6030-B
CABLE042
16 A802845 CO-EU6030-C
CABLE043

10 - 28
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

04 POWER SUPPLY UNIT EU-6031B S/N

17
19 18

20

1AC outlet JB-273*/274*(Index 05)C%DA@

Note) Excluding AC outlet JB-273*/274*(INDEX 05).
22

21 23

10 - 29
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

04 POWER SUPPLY UNIT EU-6031C~ S/N

17
19 18

20

1AC outlet JB-273*/274*(Index 05)C%DA@

Note) Excluding AC outlet JB-273*/274*(INDEX 05).
22

21 23

10 - 30
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

INDEX DESCRIPTION UNIT S/N

04 POWER SUPPLY UNIT EU-6031*

Item Code Part number Description Serial number Specification

17 A030108 EU-6031*
SUB POWER SUPPLY UNIT
18 A802846 EP511100**
HIGH VOLTAGE CIRCUIT(1)
19 A898004 EP512700**
HIGH VOLTAGE CIRCUIT(2)
20 A625058 109P0812H6D01
FAN
21 A621090 313007
FUSE For 100-120V
22 A621097 3455LS1-020
FUSE HOLDER For 100-240V
23 A621098 313004
FUSE For 200-240V

10 - 31
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

05 JUNCTION BOX JB-273*/JB-274* S/N

1 4

3 6

2 5

10 - 32
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

INDEX DESCRIPTION UNIT S/N

05 JUNCTION BOX JB-273*/JB-274*

Item Code Part number Description Serial number Specification

1 A201742 JB-273*
AC OUTLET ASSY (200V) For 200-240V
2 A802907 EP525000**
PC UNIT : AC OUT For 200-240V
3 A030070 418902
AC OUTLET For 200-240V
4 A201743 JB-274*
AC OUTLET ASSY (100V) For 100-120V
5 A802907 EP525000**
PC UNIT : AC OUT For 100-120V
6 A601016 AC-G10BB44
AC OUTLET For 100-120V

10 - 33
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

S/N:
06 USM-28 UNIT USM-28* M00101~M00300

Option:
PM-A10-H001*

Option:
EU-9100 28
2 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

4 5 6 7 8 9 27 19
20
RIGHT SIDE VIEW

10 - 34
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

S/N:
06 USM-28 UNIT USM-28* M00301~M00950

Lite Ver. Option: Option:

EU-9102 PM-A10-H001*

Option:
EU-9100 14 28
26 10 11 12 13 15 16 17 18

4 5 6 7 8 9 27 19
20
RIGHT SIDE VIEW

10 - 35
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

S/N:
06 USM-28 UNIT USM-28* M00951~M01050

Lite Ver. Option: Option: Option:

EU-9102 PM-A10-H007 PM-A10-H006
Option:
EU-9100 14 29 28
26 10 11 12 13 15 16 17 18

4 5 6 7 8 9 19
20
RIGHT SIDE VIEW

10 - 36
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

S/N:
06 USM-28 UNIT USM-28* M01051~

Lite Ver. Option: Option: Option:

EU-9102 PM-A10-H007 PM-A10-H006
Option:
EU-9100 14 29 28
26 10 11 12 13 15 16 17 18

4 5 6 7 8 9 19
20
RIGHT SIDE VIEW

10 - 37
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

06 USM-28 UNIT USM-28* S/N

PCB: Wave Generator

6 1 PCB: Tx Generator C%DA@
Note) Excluding “PCB: Tx Generator”

25 PCB: Tx Generator
×4

4 PCB: Probe Selector

EP494800AA, BB, BC EP494800BD~

1 (,C%DA@ 1 (,G%F
Note) Excluding the metal palate on Note) Including the metal palate on
“PCB: Probe Selector”. “PCB: Probe Selector”.

10 - 38
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

06 USM-28 UNIT USM-28* S/N

PCB: CPU I/O

17 1 Ok^fj(,G%F
Note) Including cables and plates

USB Ok^f)(,
Metal plate for USB cable
×3

USB Ok^f DVI Ok^f

USB cable DVI cable

16 PCB: CPU
1 EP496000**
31 CPU cooler
1 Ok^f?\kXQiMG%F
Note) Including Cable and Heat sink

10 - 39
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

S/N:
M00101~M01100,
06 USM-28 UNIT USM-28* M01151~M01184,
M01275~M01300

21 22

10 - 40
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

S/N:
M01101~M01150,
06 USM-28 UNIT USM-28* M01185~M01274,
M01301~

21 22 30
S/N: M00101 ~

10 - 41
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

INDEX DESCRIPTION UNIT S/N

06 USM-28 UNIT USM-28*

Item Code Part number Description Serial number Specification

1 A040563 USM-28*
USM-28 UNIT
2 A802908 EP497300**
PCB : TD JUMPER M00101 ~ M00300
3 A802909 EP497400**
PCB : DBF JUMPER M00101 ~ M00300
4 A802910 EP494800**
PCB : PROBE SELECTOR
5 A802911 EP494901**
PCB : MECHA FRONTEND M00101 ~ M01705
5 A803113 EP544102**
PCB : MECHA FRONTEND M01706 ~
5 A803040 EP494900**
PCB : MECHA FRONTEND M00101 ~ M01705 Option: EU-9109
5 A803114 EP544103**
PCB : MECHA FRONTEND M01706 ~ Option: EU-9124
6 A802912 EP495000**
PCB : WAVE GENERATOR
7 A802913 EP495100**
PCB : FRONTEND CONTROL
8 A802914 EP495200**
PCB : RX BEAM FORMER M00101 ~ M01050
8 A803059 EP531800**
PCB : RX BEAM FORMER M01051 ~
9 A802915 EP495300**
PCB : TIMING PROCESSOR
10 A802916 EP495400**
PCB : BEAM PROCESSOR 1 M00111 ~ M00200
10 A802917 EP523300**
PCB : BEAM PROCESSOR 1 M00201 ~ M00850
10 A803041 EP532600**
PCB : BEAM PROCESSOR 1 M00851 ~ M01240
10 A803115 EP532601**
PCB : BEAM PROCESSOR 1 M01241 ~
11 A802918 EP495500**
PCB : BEAM PROCESSOR 2 M00111 ~ M00200
11 A802919 EP523400**
PCB : BEAM PROCESSOR 2 M00201 ~ M00850
11 A803042 EP532700**
PCB : BEAM PROCESSOR 2 M00851 ~
12 A802920 EP495600**
PCB : IMAGE PROCESSOR 1 M00111 ~ M00196
12 A802921 EP495601**
PCB : IMAGE PROCESSOR 1 M00197 ~ M00850
12 A803043 EP535901**
PCB : IMAGE PROCESSOR 1 M00851 ~
13 A803044 EP495700**
PCB : IMAGE PROCESSOR 2 Option: EU-9100
14 A802922 EP495800** Lite Ver. Option:
PCB : IMAGE PROCESSOR 3
EU-9102
15 A802923 EP495900**
PCB : VIDEO PROCESSOR M00101 ~ M00850 For NTSC

10 - 42
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

INDEX DESCRIPTION UNIT S/N

06 USM-28 UNIT USM-28*

Item Code Part number Description Serial number Specification

15 A803045 EP536000**
PCB : VIDEO PROCESSOR M00851 ~ For NTSC
15 A802924 EP495901**
PCB : VIDEO PROCESSOR M00101 ~ M00850 For PAL
15 A803046 EP536001**
PCB : VIDEO PROCESSOR M00851 ~ For PAL
16 A802925 EP496000**
PCB : CPU M00101 ~ M01352
16 A803116 EP535300**
PCB : CPU M01353 ~
17 A802926 EP514100**
PCB : CPU I/O
18 A802927 EP491500**
PCB : PERIPHERAL I/O M00101 ~ M00950
18 A803047 EP533500**
PCB : PERIPHERAL I/O M00951 ~
19 A802928 EP491200**
PCB : POWER SUPPLY I/O M00101 ~ M00950
19 A803048 EP528100**
PCB : POWER SUPPLY I/O M00951 ~
20 A802929 EP491100**
PCB : BACKPLANE M00101 ~ M00950
20 A803049 EP528000**
PCB : BACKPLANE M00951 ~
21
HDD
22 A802930 CO-PSC-138-X-05C0/05C M00101 ~ M01100,
CABLE: CABLE801 M01151 ~ M01184,
0/05C0 M01275 ~ M01300
22 A803050 CO-PSC-138B-X-05C0/05 M01101 ~ M01150,
CABLE: CABLE801 M01185 ~ M01274,
C0/05C0 M01301 ~
23 A802931 CO-PSC-138-Y-01C5
CABLE: CABLE802
24 A802932 CO-USM-28-B-04C0
CABLE: CABLE301
25 A802933 EP499600**
PCB : TX GENERATOR
26 A803051 EP526200**
PCB : JUMPER M00301 ~ M01050
26 A803060 EP532500**
PCB : JUMPER M01051 ~
27 A803052 EP497100**
PCB : 3.3V POWER SUPPLY UNIT M00101 ~ M00950
28 A803053 EP520800**
PCB : PERIPHERAL I/O 2 M00101 ~ M00950 Option: PM-A10-H001*
28 A803054 EP534600**
PCB : PERIPHERAL I/O 2 M00951 ~ Option: PM-A10-H006
29 A803055 LK2146
PCB : DV BOARD M00951 ~ Option: PM-A10-H007
30 A625064 SAP-ALPHA10-06-01
FAN UNIT M00101 ~
31 A625065 FAN-Assy-P4
CPU COOLER For CPU EP4960

10 - 43
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

S/N:
07 STORAGE DRIVE UNIT EU-9098* M00101~M01530

2 4 3

10 - 44
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

S/N:
07 STORAGE DRIVE UNIT EU-9098* M01531~

6 11
1Ok^fC%DA@
4 Excluding Cable

2 3

10 - 45
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

INDEX DESCRIPTION UNIT S/N

07 STORAGE DRIVE UNIT EU-9098*

Item Code Part number Description Serial number Specification

1 A201744 EU-9098*
STORAGE DRIVE UNIT
(2) A897025 PX-W5232TA/NE
CD-RW DRIVE M00101 ~ M01530
2 A897033 Premium2/T0NK
CD-RW DRIVE M00101 ~ M01530
2 A897035 SW-9576-CHJ
DVD MULTI DRIVE M01531 ~ For EU-9098C
3 A897026 YD-8U10-01520050
FLOPPY DISK DRIVE
4 A897027 MCP3064AP
MO DISK DRIVE M00101 ~ M01530
4 A100489 SAP-ALPHA10-07-04
PANEL: USB PORT M01531 ~ For EU-9098C
5 A802934 EP517800**
PCB : USB-ATA CONVERTER M00101 ~ M01530
5 A803117 EP550300**
PCB : USB-ATA CONVERTER HUB M01531 ~ For EU-9098C
6 A802935 EP473203**
PCB : FOOT SWITCH
7 A802936 L-CABLE-732
CABLE501
8 A802937 L-CABLE-733
CABLE502
9 A802938 L-CABLE-734
CABLE510
10 A803118 L-CABLE-820
CABLE523 M01531 ~ For EU-9098C
11 A201891 SAP-ALPHA10-07-11
USB MEMORY GUARD ASSY M01531 ~ For EU-9098C

10 - 46
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

(Blank page)

10 - 47
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

08 PHYSIOLOGOCAL SIGNAL UNIT PEU-ALPHA10 S/N

5
4

10 - 48
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

INDEX DESCRIPTION UNIT S/N

08 PHYSIOLOGOCAL SIGNAL UNIT PEU-ALPHA10

Item Code Part number Description Serial number Specification

1 A010012 PEU-ALPHA10 M00101 ~ M00309

Physio Signal unit
M00313~M00315,
1 A010014 PEU-ALPHA10(B) M00310 ~ M00312
Physio Signal unit
M00316, M00350~
2 A802939 EP499700**
PCB : Physio. Amp
3 A802940 CO-PEU-ALPHA10-A-02C0
CABLE 610
4 A802941 CO-PEU-ALPHA10-B-02C0
CABLE 611
5 A802942 CO-PEU-ALPHA10-C-02C0
CABLE 612
6 A600297 PEU-ALPHA10#5
LABEL : INDICATION

10 - 49
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

S/N:
09 MONITOR IPC-1710 M00101~M01590

10 - 50
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

S/N:
09 MONITOR IPC-1710 M00101~M01590

BARE CHASSIS

7
[Yf PCB(Ok^f%)
PCB: Panel with cable assy. ]Hi
8 FAN

AC INLET lOk^f%m
AC INLET with cable assy.

10
15PIN D-SUB PYMTlOk^f%m \ckS
15PIN D-SUB Connector with cable assy. 11 FUSE

10 - 51
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

INDEX DESCRIPTION UNIT S/N

09 MONITOR IPC-1710

Item Code Part number Description Serial number Specification

1 A201745 SAP-ALPHA10-09-01
ESCUTCHEON M00101 ~ M01590 For IPC-1710*
2 A201746 MP-CV1710-1#2
COVER : REAR M00101 ~ M01590 For IPC-1710*
3 A201747 MP-CV1710-1#3
COVER : SMALL REAR M00101 ~ M01590 For IPC-1710*
4 A201748 MP-CV1710-1#4
KNOB M00101 ~ M01590 For IPC-1710*
5 A201749 MP-TI10
TILT TABLE M00101 ~ M00500 For IPC-1710*
5 A201797 MP-TI10B
TILT TABLE M00501 ~ M01590 For IPC-1710*
6 A603049 BS-C1710(C)
BARE CHASSIS M00101 ~ M01590 For IPC-1710*
7 A803056 4143000202
PCB : PANEL WITH CABLE ASSY M00101 ~ M01590 For IPC-1710*
8 A625059 D8025B12M0B5
FAN M00101 ~ M01590 For IPC-1710*
9 A803057 U-PK-3230
AC INLET WITH CABLE ASSY M00101 ~ M01590 For IPC-1710*
10 A803058 U-PK-3074A 15PIN D-SUB CONNECTOR WITH CABLE
M00101 ~ M01590 For IPC-1710*
ASSY
11 A621099 5266400052
FUSE M00101 ~ M01590 For IPC-1710*

10 - 52
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

S/N:
09 MONITOR IPF-1901 M01591~

12

]giXKZk
13 FRONT COVER

14
eIKZk
REAR COVER

15
#']JfTk
OPTICAL FILTER

10 - 53
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

S/N:
09 MONITOR IPF-1901 M01591~

19 AC IU_Tk 17 [hkRN
AC Adaptor Power Jig

DC [hkOk^f
16 DC Power Cable

AC [hkOk^f
18 AC Power Cable

10 - 54
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

INDEX DESCRIPTION UNIT S/N

09 MONITOR IPF-1901

Item Code Part number Description Serial number Specification

12 A603050 IPF-1901
LCD MONITOR M01591 ~ For IPF-1901
13 A201892 CASS-19A-FRONT
COVER : FRONT (19inch LCD MONITOR) M01591 ~ For IPF-1901
14 A201893 CASS-19A-REAR
COVER : REAR (19inch LCD MONITOR) M01591 ~ For IPF-1901
15 A603051 L-KI-929
OPTICAL FILTER M01591 ~ For IPF-1901
16 A603052 AD-POWER-JIG-A
DC Power Cable M01591 ~ For IPF-1901
17 A603053 POWER-IF-KIT
POWER JIG M01591 ~ For IPF-1901
18 A603054 PWC-250-1.5M
AC POWER CABLE M01591 ~ For IPF-1901
19 A603055 SNP-A067
AC ADAPTOR M01591 ~ For IPF-1901

10 - 55
MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

11 MONITOR ARM PSC-138-2B-1 S/N

7 11

12

10
2 TILT ASSY

5
8

3 ARM ASSY 4

13

10 - 56
 MN2-2008, Rev.2
SECTION 10 Parts List

INDEX DESCRIPTION UNIT S/N

11 MONITOR ARM PSC-138-2B-1

Item Code Part number Description Serial number Specification

1 A201894 SAP-ALPHA10-11-01
MONITOR ARM ASSY For IPF-1901
2 A201895 SAP-ALPHA10-11-02
TILT ASSY For IPF-1901
3 A201896 SAP-ALPHA10-11-03
ARM ASSY For IPF-1901
4 A201855 PSC-142-3(2)
COVER : LOWER For IPF-1901
5 A201856 PSC-142-3(4)
COVER : UPPER For IPF-1901
6 A201857 PSC-142-3(6)
COVER : TOP For IPF-1901
7 A201858 PSC-142-3(24)
COVER : TILT UPPER For IPF-1901
8 A201859 PSC-142-3(25)
COVER : TILT LOWER For IPF-1901
9 A201860 PSC-142-3(40)
MONITOR STOPPER PIN For IPF-1901
10 A201861 PSC-142-3(23)
LOCK KNOB For IPF-1901
11 A110316 SAP-ALPHA10-11-11
BACK COVER UPPER For IPF-1901
12 A110317 PSC-138-2B-1(43)
BACK COVER LOWER For IPF-1901
13 A110318 SAP-ALPHA10-11-13 For IPF-1901,
MONITOR ARM BASE COVER M00101 ~ M01590
Option: PM-A10-H008*
13 A120397 PSC-138-2B-1(52)
MONITOR ARM BASE COVER M01591 ~ For IPF-1901
14 A600323 P-32-SSD-ALPHA7-10
MONITOR ARM LABEL For IPF-1901

10 - 57